Quarterlytics / Consumer Defensive / Education & Training Services / Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Co

Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Co

hmhc · NASDAQ Consumer Defensive
Claim this profile
Ticker hmhc
Exchange NASDAQ
Sector Consumer Defensive
Industry Education & Training Services
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2012 Annual Report · Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Co
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
HMH Holdings 
(Delaware), Inc.

Annual Report for the year ended
December 31, 2012

HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. (“Company”) is not subject to the filing 
requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 
1934.  Consequently, this report has not and will not be filed with the 
Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”).  The Company is 
preparing this Annual Report and posting this Annual Report on its 
website in accordance with the requirements of the investor rights 
agreement, dated as of June 22, 2012, by and among the Company 
and the holders party thereto from time to time. 

 
 
           
 
 
                                                                                                                             
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  
Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Statements 

Certain statements contained in this report are “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of 
applicable federal securities laws.  All statements contained herein that are not clearly historical in nature 
are forward-looking and the words “may,” “will,” “should,” “anticipate,” “believe,” “could,” “expect,” 
“estimate,” “forecast,” “intend,” “plan,” “potential,” “project,” “target” and similar expressions are generally 
intended to identify forward-looking statements.  All statements contained in this report, other than 
statements of historical fact, including without limitation, statements about our plans, strategies, prospects 
and expectations regarding future events and our financial performance, are forward-looking statements 
that involve certain risks and uncertainties.  While these statements represent our current judgment on 
what the future may hold, and we believe these judgments are reasonable in the circumstances, these 
statements are not guarantees of any events or financial results, and our actual results may differ 
materially.  You are urged to consider these factors carefully in evaluating the forward-looking statements 
and are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements.  The forward-looking 
statements included in this report are made only as of the date of this report.  All subsequent written and 
oral forward-looking statements attributable to us or any person acting on our behalf are expressly 
qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section.  We 
undertake no obligation to update these forward-looking statements to reflect new information, future 
events or otherwise, except as required by law.  All forward-looking statements involve risks and 
uncertainties, many of which are beyond our control, which may cause actual results, performance or 
achievements to differ materially from anticipated results, performance or achievements.  We cannot 
assure you that projected results or events will be achieved.  Factors that could cause our actual results 
to be materially different from our expectations include those factors described in this report and other 
reports under the caption “Risk factors,” including, among others, the following:  

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

•  adverse or worsening economic trends or the continuation of current economic conditions; 
• 
changes in state and local educational funding and/or related programs, legislation and 
procurement processes; 
changes in consumer demand for, and acceptance of, our products; 
changes in competitive factors; 
industry cycles and trends; 
conditions and/or changes in the publishing industry; 
restrictions under the credit agreement governing our existing Term Loan and Revolving Credit 
Facility; 
changes in laws or regulations governing our business and operations; 
changes or failures in the information technology systems we use; 

• 
• 
•  demographic trends; 
•  uncertainty surrounding our ability to enforce our intellectual property rights; 
• 
• 

inability to retain management or hire employees; and 
impact of potential impairment of goodwill and other intangibles in a challenging economy. 

2 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. 
Annual Report 
Year Ended December 31, 2012 
Table of Contents 

Page(s) 

Item 1.    Business ........................................................................................................................................ 4 

Item 1A.  Risk Factors ................................................................................................................................ 15 

Item 1B.  Unresolved Staff Comments ....................................................................................................... 22 

Item 2.    Properties .................................................................................................................................... 23 

Item 3.    Legal Proceedings ...................................................................................................................... 24 

Item 4.    Mine Safety Disclosures…………………...…………………………………………………………...24 

Item 5.    Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of    

               Equity Securities………………………………………………………………………………………...24 

Item 6.    Selected Financial Data…………………………………………...……………………………………25 

Item 7.    Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations ...... 26 

Item 7A.  Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk ..................................................... 48 

Item 8.    Financial Statements and Supplementary Data ......................................................................... 49 

Item 9.    Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure ... 105 

Item 9A.  Controls and Procedures .......................................................................................................... 105 

Item 9B.  Other Information ...................................................................................................................... 105 

Item 10.   Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance ....................................................... 105 

Item 11.   Executive Compensation  ........................................................................................................ 111 

Item 12.   Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owner’s and Management and Related Stockholders             

                Matters ..................................................................................................................................... 126 

Item 13.   Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence ....................... 129 

Item 14.   Principal Accounting Fees and Services…..……………………………………………………….130 

Item 15.   Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules ................................................................................. 130

3 

 
 
Company Overview 

Item 1. Business 

As used herein the terms “we”, “us”, “our” and “HMH” refer to HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. and its 
consolidated subsidiaries unless otherwise expressly stated or the context otherwise requires.  Among 
the world’s largest providers of pre-K-12 education solutions and one of the longest-established 
publishing houses, we are a global leader in supporting lifelong learning.   

We are a leading provider of educational content, technology and professional services to the elementary 
and secondary school market in the United States, including a full range of comprehensive curriculum, 
supplemental products and service offerings.  We have a long-standing expertise in teaching and 
instructional strategy and the design and creation of print and electronic learning materials across all 
grade levels.  We distribute our solutions in multiple formats, including print and digital curriculum, 
technology platforms, assessment tools and services.  We believe our solutions are a mission critical tool 
for school systems as they increasingly focus on outcomes-based learning and teaching solutions that 
reach students both in the classroom and at home.  We believe we are a leader in the transformation of 
the traditional educational materials market and have the opportunity to increase net sales and 
profitability by selling our innovative solutions through a comprehensive and integrated approach to 
educating children.  Furthermore, since 1832, we have published trade and reference materials including 
award-winning adult and children’s books, fiction, and nonfiction. 

Our mission is to change people’s lives by fostering passionate, curious learners. We are experts in the 
learning process and continuously research, test, and improve what works, bringing to light new ideas 
and approaches that make learning more dynamic, engaging and effective. By combining cutting-edge 
research, editorial excellence and technological innovation, our goal is to improve teaching and learning 
environments and solve complex literacy and education challenges. Our interactive, results-driven 
education solutions are utilized by 60 million students in 120 countries. 

We focus on two primary areas: pre-K-12 educational content and resources for institutions and 
consumers; and trade publishing.   

As the leading educational publisher in the U.S. public school market, our pre-K-12 education business 
represented approximately 88% of our total revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012. Our revenue 
is diversified by geography and subject, with the highest revenue from a single state or subject 
representing approximately 7% and 20% of 2012 revenue, respectively, with less revenue derived from 
any other single state or subject.   

Our education business delivers quality, effective content and services through a variety of mediums – 
including mobile learning applications, digital platforms, educational gaming, print materials, assessment 
tools and professional development resources – across multiple platforms and devices. Our K-12 portfolio 
includes widely recognized imprints such as Holt McDougal, Riverside and Heinemann. 

Our Trade Publishing division is responsible for nearly two centuries worth of renowned and award-
winning novels, non-fiction, children’s books and reference titles. Our portfolio includes The Best 
American series; The American Heritage and Webster’s New World dictionaries; Betty Crocker, Better 
Homes and Gardens, How to Cook Everything, The Gourmet Cookbook, and other leading culinary 
properties;  the Peterson Field Guides; CliffsNotes; the works of J.R.R. Tolkien; and many 
iconic children’s books and characters including Curious George, The Little Prince and The 
Polar Express.  

Across both segments, we focus on the expansion of our digital content portfolio to include web and 
application-based social games and other products that build upon the skills and lessons taught in the 
classroom and at home. Recently released mobile apps such as Curious George at the Zoo demonstrate 
the opportunities to leverage our trusted consumer brands within our digital education offerings.   

4 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
For the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, our net sales were $1,285.6 million, $1,295.3 
million and $1,507.0 million (on a combined basis), respectively.    

Corporate history 

HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. 

HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. (“HMH Holdings”, “HMH”, “Company”, or “Houghton Mifflin Harcourt”, 
“we”, “us”, “our”, or the “Company”) was incorporated as a Delaware corporation on March 5, 2010 and 
was established to be the holding company of the current operating group.  HMH is a leading global 
education and learning company providing innovative solutions and approaches to the challenges facing 
education today.  We are one of the world’s largest providers of educational products and solutions for 
pre-K–12 learning and we also develop and deliver interactive, results-driven learning solutions that 
advance teacher effectiveness and student achievement in the Education market.  Furthermore, since 
1832, we have published trade and reference materials including award-winning adult and children’s 
books, fiction, and nonfiction. 

Restructuring and reorganization 

On May 10, 2012, we entered into a Restructuring Support Agreement (“Plan Support Agreement”) with 
consenting creditors holding greater than 74% of the principal amount of the outstanding senior secured 
indebtedness of the Company and with equity owners holding approximately 64% of the Company’s 
outstanding common stock.  The consenting creditors agreed to support the Company’s Pre-Packaged 
Chapter 11 Plan of Reorganization (“Plan”).  Pursuant to the Plan Support Agreement, the Company 
agreed to use its best efforts to (i) support and complete the restructuring and all transactions 
contemplated by the Plan, (ii) take any and all necessary and appropriate actions in furtherance of the 
restructuring contemplated under the Plan, (iii) complete the restructuring and all transactions 
contemplated under the Plan within set time-frames, (iv) obtain any and all required regulatory and/or 
third-party approvals for the restructuring, and (v) not directly or indirectly, seek, solicit, support, or 
engage in the negotiation or formulation of alternate plans of reorganization that were inconsistent with 
the reorganization as contemplated by the Plan Support Agreement. 

On May 21, 2012 (the “Petition Date”), the U.S. based entities that borrowed or guaranteed the debt of 
the Company (collectively the “Debtors”), filed voluntary petitions for relief under Chapter 11 of the federal 
bankruptcy laws in the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York (“Court”).  
Concurrently therewith, the Debtors also filed the Plan, the Disclosure Statement in support of the Plan 
and filed various motions seeking relief to continue operations.  Following the Petition Date, the Debtors 
operated their business as “debtors in possession” (“DIP”) under the jurisdiction of the Court and in 
accordance with the applicable provisions of the Bankruptcy Code and orders of the Court.  Under 
Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code (“Chapter 11”), certain claims against us in existence 
before the Petition Date were stayed while we operated our business as a DIP including any actions that 
might be commenced with regards to secured claims, although the holders of such claims had the right to 
move the Court for relief from the stay.  Subsequent to the Petition Date, these claims were reflected in 
the balance sheet as liabilities subject to compromise.  Secured claims were secured primarily by liens on 
the Company’s accounts receivable.  Additional claims (liabilities subject to compromise) could have 
potentially arisen after the filing date resulting from rejection of executory contracts or from the 
determination by the Court (or agreed to by parties in interest).   

On June 22, 2012, the Company successfully emerged from bankruptcy as a reorganized company 
pursuant to the Plan.  Ultimately, the Debtors did not reject any executory contracts during the bankruptcy 
case, and the Company continues to review and reconcile claims that were filed against it by creditors.     

On March 9, 2010, we completed a restructuring of certain indebtedness and an upper-tier 
reorganization. As part of the reorganization, Riverdeep Interactive Learning, an Irish company and our 
previous parent company (“RIL”), entered into a series of transactions that ultimately resulted in HMH 

5 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Holdings and its subsidiaries no longer being subsidiaries of RIL. In the out-of-court restructuring, the 
then-existing first lien lenders received approximately 90% of the equity of HMH Holdings (pre-dilution 
from the associated rights offering) in exchange for converting $2 billion of debt and the then-existing 
mezzanine lenders received approximately 10% of the equity and warrants to purchase up to an 
additional 12.5% of the incremental value above a specified equity value (in each case, pre-dilution from 
the rights offering) in exchange for converting $2 billion of debt. In addition, we used the proceeds from 
the $650 million rights offering issued to certain then-existing first lien lenders and mezzanine lenders to 
pay transaction fees, accrued cash interest and fund cash on the balance sheet.   

As a result, the financial information presented in this report for the years ended December 31, 2012, 
December 31, 2011 and the period from March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010 represents the results of 
operations of HMH Holdings and its consolidated subsidiaries, and the financial information presented in 
this report for the period from January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 represents the results of operations of 
HMH Publishing, our predecessor, and its consolidated subsidiaries. 

The historical financial information presented for 2010 has been derived from the financial statements and 
accounting records of HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. (“Successor”) for the period March 10, 2010 to 
December 31, 2010 and from the financial statements and accounting records of HMH Publishing 
Company (“Predecessor”) for the period January 1, 2008 through March 9, 2010.  We have presented our 
2010 results as the mathematical addition of the Predecessor and Successor periods (the “Combined 
Period”).  We believe that this presentation provides meaningful information about our results of 
operations.  This approach is not consistent with GAAP, may yield results that are not strictly comparable 
on a period-to-period basis and may not reflect the actual results we would have achieved.  Prior to 
March 9, 2010, the financial information is for the Predecessor entity and following March 9, 2010 the 
financial information is for the Successor entity.   

Strategic Priorities 

To promote sustainable growth, product diversification and a strong global brand, we continue to focus on 
aligning our resources and efforts against the following priorities: 

•  Reinforce the Core Business – Maintain our market share of pre-K-12 by continuing to innovate 

from a product and marketing perspective. 

•  Prudently Invest in Growth – Broaden our market presence from a geographic, customer and 

product perspective through: 

International expansion 

o 
o  Moving into the consumer (student, teacher, parent and lifelong learner) market 
o  Continued focus on products and services with proven efficacy and deep pedagogical 

strength / market following 

o  Building a comprehensive portfolio of offerings to include supplemental materials and 

services 

•  Lead Digital Transition – Reengineer our product development processes to allow for greater 

focus on digital innovation and on building quality, adaptive content that can be consumed across 
multiple platforms, devices and mediums. 

•  Know the Customer – Shift from a product-centric to a customer-focused approach in all aspects 

of our business, including product and service design and delivery. 

•  Leverage Strategic Partnerships and Alliances – Develop and expand relationships with strategic 
partners that already have a strong presence in HMH’s targeted growth markets; and forge 
alliances with the world’s leading technology companies to ensure that our quality, device-
agnostic content is available to virtually any school district or household. 

6 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
•  Drive Operational Excellence – Continue to increase profit margins by refining organizational 

structure, investing in intelligence, process and tools, and attracting and retaining superior talent. 

•  Harvest Non-Core Product Lines – Evaluate divestment to ensure efficient use of capital and 

invest only at maintenance levels in profitable but declining product lines. 

Business Segments 

We are organized along two business segments: Education and Trade Publishing.  The Education 
segment is our largest business, and represented on average approximately 90% of our total net sales for 
the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010. 

Education 

Our Education business provides a comprehensive suite of educational products, technology platforms 
and services to meet the diverse needs of today’s classrooms. These products and services include print 
and digital content in the form of textbooks, digital courseware, instructional aids, educational assessment 
and intervention solutions (which are aimed at improving achievement and supporting learning for 
students that are not keeping pace with peers), professional development and school reform services. 
With an in-house editorial staff supplemented by external specialists, we develop programs that can be 
aligned to state standards and customized for specific state requests. In addition, our Education segment 
offers a wide range of educational, cognitive and developmental standardized testing products in print, 
CD-ROM and online formats, targeting the educational and clinical assessment markets. The principal 
markets for our Education products are elementary and secondary school systems. 

The Education business includes such trusted brands as Holt McDougal, Great Source, Rigby, Saxon, 
Steck-Vaughn, Math in Focus, Riverside and Heinemann. These brands offer solutions in reading, 
language arts, mathematics, intervention, social studies, science and world languages, as well as 
curriculum resources, professional development services and an array of highly regarded educational, 
cognitive and developmental assessment products.  Each brand benefits from strong market share as 
well as strong relationships with its customers, most of which have been developed over many years 
through a service-based approach to designing, marketing and implementing its programs. 

The Education segment net sales and Adjusted EBITDA were $1,128.6 million and $329.7 million, 
$1,169.6 million and $278.9 million and $1,383.1 million and $490.3 million, for the years ended 
December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.  

Our Education products are divided into the following subgroups: 

•  Comprehensive Curriculum. The Comprehensive Curriculum subgroup develops comprehensive 
educational programs intended to provide a complete course of study in a subject, either at a 
single grade level or across multiple grade levels, and are the primary source of classroom 
instruction. We develop and market Comprehensive Curriculum programs for the Pre-K-12 
market utilizing the Houghton Mifflin Harcourt brands in grades Pre-K-6 and the Holt McDougal 
brands in grades 6-12. This subgroup focuses its publishing portfolio on the subjects that have 
consistently received the highest priority from educators and educational policy makers, namely 
reading, literature/language arts, mathematics, science, world languages and social studies. In 
each subject, comprehensive learning programs are designed and then marketed with a variety of 
proprietary products to maximize teaching effectiveness, including textbooks, workbooks, 
teachers’ guides and resources, audio/visual aids and technology-based products. Our 
Comprehensive Curriculum subgroup accounted for approximately 56.2%, 60.6% and 67.8% of 
our total Education segment net sales for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, 
respectively. 

•  Supplemental products. We develop products targeted at addressing struggling learners through 
comprehensive intervention solutions, products targeted at assisting English language learners 

7 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
and products providing incremental instruction in a particular subject area. Curriculum solutions 
are used both as alternatives and as supplements to Comprehensive Curriculum programs, 
enabling local educators to tailor their education programs in a cost-effective way that is 
irrespective of adoption schedules. As a result, the Supplemental Products subgroup creates net 
sales and earnings that do not vary greatly with the adoption cycle. In addition, the development 
of supplemental materials tends to require significantly less capital investment than the 
development of a Comprehensive Curriculum program.  Our Supplemental Products subgroup 
accounted for approximately 13.0%, 12.5% and 10.1% of our total Education segment net sales 
for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. 

•  Heinemann. Our Heinemann products include professional books and development resources to 
teachers of grades pre-K-12 and are known by educators for empowering teachers and giving 
them access to highly regarded and recognized experts in the education field. The author base 
includes some of the most prominent experts in teaching, who support the practice of other 
teachers through books, videos, workshops and classroom tools.  Heinemann has also 
developed a market leading literacy intervention program with Benchmarks/LLI, which comprises 
roughly 50% of Heinemann product revenues.  Our Heinemann subgroup accounted for 
approximately 10.9%, 8.8% and 6.8% of our total Education segment net sales for the years 
ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. 

•  Professional Services. To extend our value proposition beyond curriculum, assessment and 
technology solutions, we provide consulting services to assist school districts in increasing 
accountability for improvement and offering professional development training, comprehensive 
services and school turnaround solutions. We believe our professional services, led by The 
Leadership and Learning Center business, offer unique integrated solutions that combine the best 
learning resources available today with services that support deep implementation. These include 
learning resources that are supported with effective professional development in classroom 
assessment, teacher effectiveness and high impact leadership, which are all proven to have a 
measurable and sustainable impact on student achievement.  Our Professional Services 
subgroup accounted for approximately 6.1%, 4.4% and 0.0% of our total Education business net 
sales for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. 

•  Riverside Assessment.  Riverside Assessment products provide district and state level solutions 
focused on clinical, group and formative assessment tools and platform solutions. Clinical 
solutions provide psychological and special needs testing to assess intellectual, cognitive and 
behavioral development. Our products include measurements relating to intellectual ability, 
academic achievement assessments around cognitive abilities and several diagnostic and 
assessment tools that assist in identifying the learning needs of students.  Riverside Assessment 
products accounted for 8.2%, 9.0% and 8.0% of our total Education segment net sales for the 
years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.  

• 

International.  Our International business primarily focuses on selling educational solutions and 
products into global education markets predominantly to large English language schools in high 
growth territories primarily in Asia, the Pacific, the Middle East, Latin America, the Caribbean and 
Africa.  In addition to a dedicated sales and business development team, we have a global 
network of international partners and alliances, including distributors, in local markets around the 
world.  International sales accounted for approximately 5.6%, 4.7% and 7.3% of our total 
Education segment net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, 
respectively. 

Trade Publishing 

Our Trade Publishing business, which dates back to 1832, primarily develops, markets and sells 
consumer books in print and digital formats and licenses book rights to other publishers and electronic 
businesses in the United States and abroad. The principal markets for Trade Publishing products are 

8 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
retail stores, both physical and online, and wholesalers. Reference materials are also sold to schools, 
colleges, libraries, office supply distributors and other businesses. 

Our Trade Publishing business offers a rich library of general interest, children’s and reference works that 
include beloved characters and well-known brands. Our award-winning general interest titles encompass 
literary fiction, culinary, and non-fiction in hardcover, ebook and paperback formats, including the Mariner 
Books and Harvest Books paperback lines. Among the general interest properties are the popular J.R.R. 
Tolkien titles and the Best American series. The general interest group also publishes comprehensive 
culinary works and field guides, such as the Peterson Field Guides and Taylor’s Gardening Guides. With 
the 2012 acquisition of certain culinary and reference assets, we became the #2 publisher in those 
respective market niches. Our vast catalog of books for young readers features numerous Newbery and 
Caldecott medal winners, including a 2012 Caldecott Honor winner. Our young readers list addresses a 
broad age group, spanning board books for the very young to novels for young adults, and includes 
recognized characters such as Curious George and Martha Speaks, both successful television programs 
featured on PBS, Five Little Monkeys, Gossie and Gertie, and many more. In the reference category, we 
are the publisher of the American Heritage and Webster dictionary, and related titles. 

Even before ebooks gained prominence in the market, we had developed in-house experience in 
converting, structuring, storing and distributing dictionary and other reference content for digital platforms, 
and leveraged our knowledge and tools in the digital space to apply to consumer trade content including 
e-books and applications.  As such, we have an established, innovative and flexible solution for 
converting, manipulating and distributing trade content to the many rapidly emerging digital consumer 
platforms such as e-readers and tablets. We have been able to move quickly to take advantage of the 
rapidly accelerating market for e-books, book or character based apps and other digital products with net 
sales from e-books reaching approximately $25.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, and now 
representing a meaningful piece of our Trade Publishing business.  We continue to focus on the 
development of innovative new digital products which capitalize on our strong content, our digital 
expertise, and the growing consumer demand for these products. 

For the years ended December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010, Trade Publishing net sales and Adjusted 
EBITDA were approximately $157.1 million and $28.8 million,$125.7 million and $12.9 million, and $123.9 
million and $12.7 million, respectively.  

Our Industry 

K-12 comprehensive curriculum (basal) market 

The United States K-12 comprehensive curriculum (basal) market provides educational programs and 
assessments to approximately 56 million students across approximately 116,000 elementary and 
secondary schools. Basal programs cover curriculum standards in a particular subject and include a 
comprehensive offering of teacher and student materials required to conduct the class throughout the 
year. Products and services in basal programs include students’ print and digital offerings and a variety of 
supporting materials such as teacher’s editions, formative assessments, whole group instruction 
materials, practice aids, educational games and services. 

Comprehensive curriculum programs are the primary source of classroom education for most K-12 
academic subjects, and as a result, enrollment trends are a major driver of industry growth. Although 
economic cycles may affect short-term buying patterns, school enrollments, a driver of growth in the 
educational publishing industry, are highly predictable and are trending favorably over the longer term.  

In addition, the market for comprehensive curriculum programs is affected by changes in state curriculum 
standards, which drive instruction, assessment, and accountability in each state.  A significant change in 
state curriculum standards requires that assessments, teacher training programs, and instructional 
materials be revised or replaced to align to the new standards and historically has driven demand for new 
comprehensive curriculum programs.   

9 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Forty-five states have adopted a new, common set of curriculum standards in mathematics and English 
language arts, known as the Common Core State Standards.   These standards are the product of a 
state-led effort to establish a single set of clear educational standards for grades K-12.  States that have 
adopted the Common Core State Standards must base at least 85% of their state curricula on the 
standards.  Most of these states also belong to one of two multistate testing consortia that are developing 
common state assessments in English language arts and mathematics, aligned to the new 
standards.  The tests, which will be designed to replace existing statewide tests, are expected to be 
administered beginning in 2014-15.  Schools in these states will need to augment and replace 
instructional materials, including comprehensive curriculum programs, to align to Common Core State 
Standards and to prepare students for the new state assessments.   

Textbook adoption process 

Twenty states approve and procure basal programs on a state-wide basis (“adoption states”) before 
individual schools or school districts can purchase materials. In all remaining states, referred to as “open 
states” or “open territories,” each individual school or school district can procure materials without state 
restrictions. 

The following chart illustrates the current adoption and open states: 

Adoption states represent over 50% of the U.S. elementary and secondary school-age population. Many 
adoption states provide “categorical funding” for instructional materials, which means that state funds 
cannot be used for any other purpose. A majority of adoption states provide categorical state funding for 
instructional materials, i.e., funds that typically cannot be used for any purpose other than to purchase 
instructional content or, is some cases, technology equipment used to deliver instruction.  In some states, 
categorical instructional materials funds can be used only for the purchase of materials on the state-
approved list. 

In adoption states, the state education board’s decision to approve a certain program developed by an 
educational publisher depends on recommendations that align to state’s educational standards from 
instructional materials committees, which are often comprised of educators and curriculum specialists. 
These committees will recommend a program only if it aligns to the state’s educational content standards.  
To ensure the approval and subsequent success of a new instructional materials program, extensive 
market research is conducted, including: discussions of the planned curriculum with the state level 
curriculum advisors to secure their support; development of prototype instructional materials that are 
focus-tested with educators, often against competing programs, to gather feedback on the program’s 
content and design; and incorporation of qualitative input from existing customers in terms of classroom 
needs. 

In open territories, sales teams present to instructional materials selection committees, which in turn 
make recommendations to district level school boards.  Products are generally customized to meet the 
states’ curriculum standards with similar research methods as in adoption states. 

10 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
We believe that a publisher’s ultimate success in a given state will depend on a variety of factors, 
including the quality of its programs and materials, the strength of its relationships with key decision-
makers at the state and district level and the magnitude of its marketing and sales efforts. As a result, 
educational publishers often implement formal market research efforts that include educator focus 
groups, prototypes of student and ancillary materials and comparisons against competing products. At the 
same time, marketing and editorial staffs work closely together to incorporate the results of research into 
products and developing the most updated, research- and needs-based curricula. 

Supplemental materials market 

The supplemental materials market includes a wide range of product offerings targeted at addressing 
specific needs in a district generally not addressed through a comprehensive curriculum solution. These 
products come in the form of print, digital, service and blended product solutions. The development of 
supplemental materials tends to require significantly less capital investment than the development of a 
basal program. These materials enable local educators to tailor their education programs in a cost-
effective way that is not tied to adoption schedules.  

Supplemental products and services are funded through state and local resources as well as government 
funding allocations through Title 1 and the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA). Title 1 
distributes funding to schools and school districts with a high percentage of students from low income 
families. In addition, Title 1 appropriates money for the education system for the prevention of dropouts 
and the improvement of schools. IDEA governs how states and public agencies provide early 
intervention, special education and related services to children with disabilities. In recent years, the 
supplemental materials that schools have purchased have changed as the demands and expectations for 
educators and students have changed. Educational institutions have increasingly purchased digital 
solutions along with traditional supplemental materials and, with the growing emphasis on accountability, 
targeted intervention solutions, school reform and turnaround services are increasingly in demand. 

Assessment market 

The assessment market includes summative, formative/in-classroom, and diagnostic assessments. 
Summative assessments are concluding or “final” exams that measure students’ proficiency in a particular 
subject or group of subjects on an aggregate level or against state standards. Formative assessments are 
on-going, in-classroom tests that occur throughout the school year and monitor progress in certain 
subjects or curriculum units. Diagnostic assessments are designed to pinpoint areas of need and are 
often administered by specialists to identify learning difficulties and qualify individuals for special services 
under the requirements of Individual Disabilities Education Act (IDEA).   

As a result of RTTT (Race to the Top) funding, more states and districts are also placing greater 
emphasis on teacher evaluation systems that measure teacher performance based on standardized test 
scores and other elements required in formulas derived by the policymakers. Federal agencies are 
pushing the focus to children at even younger ages to provide intervention before significant achievement 
gaps are realized. This is leading to more opportunity in the early childhood market space from birth to 
eight. 

The two assessment consortia —Smarter Balanced Assessment Consortia (SBAC) and Partnership 
Assessment of Readiness for College and Careers (PARCC)—continue to work towards operational tests 
for the 2014–2015 school year. There are 24 states in SBAC and 23 states in PARCC. Some states are 
still in both and will have to make a determination about which test to use over the next year or so.  
As states plan for how they will deal with the upcoming consortia assessments, districts continue to 
transition to the Common Core State Standards as well as focus on their state standards being measured 
in the short term for accountability purposes. There is anticipation now for the Next Generation Science 
Standards, which are due to be final and released in March 2013. District demand for quality measures to 
help them prepare for the content coverage and item types anticipated on the common core assessment 
should continue to increase as the 2014–2015 requirement draws near.  

11 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
International market 

The  global  education  market  continues  to  demonstrate  strong  macro  long-term  growth  characteristics.  
There  are  1.4  billion  students  out  of  a  7.1  billion  world  population.    Population  growth  is  a  leading 
indicator  for  pre-primary  school  enrollments,  which  subsequently  impact  on  secondary  and  higher 
education  enrolments.    Globally,  rapid  population  growth  in  the  past  5  years  has  caused  pre-primary 
enrolments  to  grow  at  16%  worldwide,  this  is  expected  to  be  20%  with  new  growth  rates.    The  global 
population  is  expected  to  be  9.2  billion  by  2050,  as  countries  develop  and  improvements  in  medical 
conditions increase the birth rate. 

In 2011, global education expenditure was $4,435 billion.  K-12 education represents a total of 58.6% of 
global  education  expenditure.    Global  education  expenditure  is  projected  to  grow  at  7.4%  through  to 
2017. 

We  predominantly  export  and  sell  K-12  books  into  the  niche  global  market  of  high-end  international 
private schools that follow the US curriculum.  We sell to schools in this market across Asia, the Pacific, 
the Middle East, Latin America and the Caribbean.  Our International sales team utilizes a global network 
of international partners and alliances, including distributors in local markets around the world.  The size 
of the K-12 US Export market is estimated at $165 million, of which we have a strong market share.  

Our immediate strategy is to expand our addressable market through working with local partners to 
localize our K-12 content for sale into public & private schools in targeted international markets and to sell 
digitized content through key partnerships / alliances into global school and consumer markets. 

Trade Publishing market 

The market for consumer books (Trade Publishing market) includes works of fiction and non-fiction for 
adults and children, dictionaries and other reference works. While print remains the primary format in 
which Trade books are produced and distributed, the market for Trade titles in digital format (primarily 
ebooks) has developed rapidly over the past several years, and the industry has quickly evolved to 
embrace new technologies for developing, producing, marketing and distributing Trade works.  

Seasonality 

In the K-12 market, we typically receive payments for products and services from individual school 
districts, and, to a lesser extent, individual schools and states. In the trade publishing market, payment is 
received for products and services from book distributors and retail booksellers. In the case of testing and 
assessment products and services, payment is received from the individually contracted parties. 

Approximately 88% of our fiscal 2012 net sales was derived from educational publishing, which is a 
markedly seasonal business. Schools make most of their purchases in the second and third quarters of 
the calendar year in preparation for the beginning of the school year. Thus, over the past three years, 
approximately 69% of consolidated net sales have historically been realized in the second and third 
quarters. Sales of K-12 instructional materials and customized testing products are also cyclical, with 
some years offering more sales opportunities than others. The amount of funding available at the state 
level for educational materials also has a significant effect on year-to-year net sales. 

Competition 

We sell our products in competitive markets. In these markets, product quality, customer service and 
perceived stability and longevity are major factors in generating sales growth. Other factors affecting 
sales growth in the K-12 market include the level of student enrollment in subjects that are up for adoption 
and the level of spending per student appropriated in each state and/or school district. Profitability is 
affected by industry developments including: (i) competitive selling, sampling and implementation costs; 
(ii) development costs for customized instructional materials and assessment programs; and (iii) higher 

12 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
technology costs due to the increased number of textbook program components being developed in 
digital formats. There are three primary traditional Comprehensive Curriculum publishers in the K-12 
market, which also compete with a variety of specialized or regional publishers that focus on select 
disciplines and/or geographic regions. There are multiple competitors in the Trade Publishing, 
supplemental and assessment markets. 

Printing and binding; raw materials 

We outsource the printing and binding of our products, with approximately 81% of our printing currently 
handled by two vendors.  We have a procurement agreement with each printer that provides volume and 
scheduling flexibility and price predictability. We have a longstanding relationship with each provider.  
Paper is one of our principal raw materials. We purchase our paper directly from suppliers and two paper 
merchants with whom we have various agreements that protect against price increases. We have not 
experienced and do not anticipate experiencing difficulty in obtaining adequate supplies of paper for our 
operations, as we have contracts with numerous suppliers that assure us of 100% availability on all main 
paper grades that we procure. 

Distribution 

We operate five distribution facilities from which we coordinate our own distribution process: one each in 
Indianapolis, Indiana; Geneva, Illinois; Lewisville, Texas; Troy, Missouri; and Kennesaw, Georgia. 
Additionally, some adoption states require us to use in-state textbook depositories for educational 
materials sold in that particular state.  We utilize delivery firms including United Parcel Service Inc., CH 
Robinson Worldwide Inc., Roadrunner Transportation Services and DHL Worldwide Express Inc. to 
facilitate the principally ground transportation of products. 

Employees 

As of December 31, 2012, we had approximately 3,300 employees, none of which were covered by 
collective bargaining agreements.  These employees are substantially located in the United States with 
approximately 200 employees located outside of the United States. We believe that relations with 
employees are generally good. 

Intellectual property 

Our principal intellectual property assets consist of our trademarks and copyrights in our content. 
Substantially all of our publications are protected by copyright, whether registered or unregistered, either 
in our name as the author of a work made for hire or the assignee of copyright, or in the name of an 
author who has licensed us to publish the work. Such copyrights secure the exclusive right to publish the 
work in the United States and in many countries abroad for specified periods: in the United States in most 
cases either 95 years from publication or for the author’s life plus 70 years, but in any event a minimum of 
28 years for works published prior to 1978 and 35 years for works published thereafter. 

We do not own any material patents, franchises or concessions, but we have registered certain 
trademarks and service marks in connection with our publishing businesses. We believe we have taken, 
and take in the ordinary course of business, all appropriate available legal steps to reasonably protect our 
intellectual property in all material jurisdictions. 

Environmental matters 

We generally contract with independent printers and binders for their services, and our operations are 
generally not otherwise affected by environmental laws and regulations. However, as the owner and 
lessee of real property, we are subject to environmental laws and regulations, including those relating to 
the discharge of hazardous materials into the environment, the remediation of contaminated sites and the 

13 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
handling and disposal of wastes. It is possible that we could face liability, regardless of fault, and can be 
held jointly or severally liable, if contamination were to be discovered on the properties that we own or 
lease or on properties that we have formerly owned or leased. We are currently unaware of any material 
environmental liabilities or other material environmental issues relating to our properties or operations and 
anticipate no material expenditures for compliance with environmental laws or regulations. 

14 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 1A. Risk Factors 

The following factors affect our business and the industry in which we operate.  The risks and 
uncertainties described below are not the only ones we face.  Additional risks and uncertainties not 
presently known or that we currently consider immaterial may also have an adverse effect on our 
business.  If any of the matters discussed in the following risk factors were to occur, our business, 
financial position, results of operations, cash flows, or prospects could be materially adversely affected. 

Introduction of new products, services or technologies could impact our profitability. 

We operate in highly competitive markets that continue to change to adapt to customer needs.  In order to 
maintain a competitive position, we must continue to invest in new offerings and new ways to deliver our 
products and services.  These investments may not be profitable or may be less profitable than what we 
have experienced historically.  In particular, in the context of the Company’s current focus on key digital 
opportunities, including e-books, the market is beginning to develop and the Company may be 
unsuccessful in establishing itself as a significant factor in any market which does develop.  New 
distribution channels, such as digital platforms, the internet, online retailers and growing delivery 
platforms (e.g., e-readers), present both threats and opportunities to the Company’s traditional publishing 
models, potentially impacting both sales volumes and pricing.  

Our U.S. educational comprehensive curriculum, supplemental and assessment business may be 
adversely affected by changes in state and local educational funding resulting from either general 
economic conditions, changes in government educational funding, programs and legislation (both 
at the federal and state level), and/or changes in the state procurement process. 

The results and growth of our U.S. educational comprehensive curriculum, supplemental and assessment 
businesses are dependent on the level of federal and state educational funding, which in turn is 
dependent on the robustness of state finances and the level of funding allocated to educational programs.  
Most public school districts, the primary customers for K-12 products and services, are largely dependent 
on state and local funding to purchase materials.  In school districts in states that primarily rely on local 
tax proceeds, significant reductions in those proceeds for any reason can severely restrict district 
purchases of instructional materials.  In districts and states that primarily rely on state funding for 
instructional materials, a reduction in state funds or loosening of restrictions on the use of those funds 
may reduce net sales.  Additionally, many school districts receive substantial sums through Federal 
education programs, funding for which may be reduced as a result of the Federal sequester.     

Federal and/or state legislative changes can also affect the funding available for educational expenditure, 
which include the impact of education reform such as the reauthorization of the Elementary and 
Secondary Education Act (“ESEA”) and the implementation of Common Core State Standards.  Existing 
programs and funding streams could be changed or eliminated in connection with legislation to 
reauthorize the ESEA and/or the federal appropriations process, in ways that could negatively affect 
demand and sources of funding for our products and services.  Similarly, changes in the state 
procurement process for textbooks, supplemental material and student tests, particularly in adoption 
states, can also affect our markets and sales.  For example, changes in curricula, delays in the timing of 
the adoptions and changes in the student testing process can all affect these programs and therefore the 
size of our market in any given year.   

There are multiple competing demands for educational funds and there is no guarantee that states will 
fund the purchase of new textbooks or testing programs, or that we will win this business. 

15 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Changes in educational funding could have a material and adverse impact on our business, results of 
operations, financial condition, liquidity and future prospects, and, as a result, could also cause us not to 
be in compliance with the financial covenants in our credit facilities. 

A significant portion of net sales is derived from sales of K-12 instructional materials pursuant to 
cyclical adoption schedules, and if we are unable to maintain residual sales and continue to 
generate new business, net sales could be materially and adversely affected. 

Due to the revolving and staggered nature of state adoption schedules, sales of K-12 instructional 
materials have traditionally been cyclical, with some years offering more sales opportunities than others.  
Furthermore, we cannot make assurances that states that have adopted our programs, or that schools 
and school districts that have purchased our products and services, will do so again in the future.  A 
significant portion of net sales is dependent upon our ability to maintain residual sales and to continue to 
generate new business.  For example, over the next couple of years, adoptions are scheduled in the 
primary subjects of reading, language arts and literature, social studies and mathematics in, among 
others, the states of Texas and Florida, two of the largest adoption states.  The inability to succeed in 
these two states, or reductions in their anticipated funding levels, could materially and adversely affect net 
sales for subsequent years.  Furthermore, allowing districts flexibility to use State funds previously 
dedicated exclusively to the purchase of instructional materials for things such as technology hardware 
and training, which could adversely affect district expenditures on state-adopted instructional materials in 
the future.    

Our operating results fluctuate on a seasonal and quarterly basis and in the event we do not 
generate sufficient net sales in the third quarter, we may not be able to meet our obligations. 

Our business is seasonal.  For the year ended December 31, 2012, we derived approximately 88% of net 
sales from educational publishing in the Education business.  For sales of educational products, 
purchases typically are made primarily in the second and third quarters of the calendar year, in 
preparation for the beginning of the school year, though testing net sales are primarily generated in the 
second and fourth quarters.  We typically realize a significant portion of net sales during the third quarter, 
making third-quarter results material to full-year performance.  This sales seasonality affects operating 
cash flow from quarter to quarter.  We normally incur a net cash deficit from all of our activities through 
the middle of the third quarter of the year.  We cannot make assurances that our third quarter net sales 
will continue to be sufficient to meet our obligations or that they will be higher than net sales for our other 
quarters. 

Our business will be impacted by the rate of and state of technological change, including the 
digital evolution and other disruptive technologies. 

A common trend in the publishing industry is the digitalization of content and proliferation of distribution 
channels, either over the internet, or via other electronic means, replacing traditional print formats.  The 
digital migration brings the need for change in product distribution, consumers’ perception of value and 
the publisher’s position between retailers and authors.   

Such digitalization increases competitive threats both from large media players and from smaller 
businesses, online and mobile portals.  If we are unable to adapt and transition to the move to 
digitalization at the rate of our competitors, our ability to effectively compete in the marketplace will be 
affected.   

We are a party to at-will contracts with significant customers and the termination of these 
contracts could harm our business. 

We currently provide or have agreements to provide products and services to governmental agencies, 
school districts and educational facilities under contracts that are generally terminable at-will.  The fact 
that these customers have at-will contracts with us gives rise to the possibility that we may have no 
recourse in the event of customer cancellation of a contract.  In addition, contracts awarded by states 

16 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
pursuant to a procurement process are subject to challenge by competitors and other parties during and 
after that process.  We anticipate that we will continue to rely predominately upon customers under such 
at-will contractual arrangements.  As a result of this reliance, the election by these customers to terminate 
any or all of their at-will contracts with us, or the loss of or decrease in business from several of our large 
customers, could materially and adversely affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results 
of operations. 

We may not be able to identify successful business models for generating sales of technology 
based programs.  Furthermore, customers’ expectations for the number and sophistication of 
technology-based programs that are given to them at no additional charge may increase, as may 
development costs. 

The core curriculum elementary school, core curriculum secondary school and educational testing 
customers have become accustomed to being given technology-based products at no additional charge 
from publishers, such as us, as incentives to adopt programs and other products.  The sophistication and 
expense of technology-based products continues to grow.  Our profitability may decrease materially if  we 
are unable to realize sales of these products, customers continue to expect/insist on an increasing 
number of technology-based materials of increasing quality being given to them, or costs of these 
products continue to rise. 

The presence and development of open-sourced content could continue to increase as  
foundations and other parties fund development of educational content to be offered to schools 
and the public at no cost, which could adversely affect our revenue. 

In recent years there have been initiatives by non-profit organizations such as the Gates Foundation and 
the Hewlett Foundation to develop educational content that can be “open sourced” and made available to 
educational institutions for free or nominal cost.  To the extent that such open sourced content is 
developed and made available to educational customers and is competitive with our instructional 
materials, our sales opportunities and net sales could be adversely affected. 

Changes in product distribution channels and/or customer bankruptcy may restrict our ability to 
grow and affect our profitability in our Trade Publishing business. 

New distribution channels such as digital formats, the internet, online retailers, growing delivery platforms 
(e.g. e-readers), combined with the concentration of retailer power, pose threats and provide 
opportunities to our traditional consumer publishing models in our Trade Publishing business, potentially 
impacting both sales volumes and pricing.  The economic slowdown combined with the trend to e-books 
has created contraction in the consumer books retail market that has increased the risk of bankruptcy of 
major retail customers as evidenced by the 2010 bankruptcy filing of the Borders book chain, which 
resulted in the write-off of a receivable of $4.4 million.  Additional bankruptcies of traditional “bricks and 
mortar” retailers of Trade Publishing could negatively affect our financial performance.  

Expansion of our investments and business outside of our traditional core U.S. market may result 
in lower than expected returns and incremental risks. 

To take advantage of international growth opportunities and to reduce our reliance on our core U.S. 
market, we are increasing our investments in a number of countries and emerging markets, including Asia 
and the Middle East, some of which are inherently more risky than our investments in the U.S. market.  
Political, economic, currency, reputational and corporate governance risks (including fraud) as well as 
unmanaged expansion are all factors which could limit our returns on investments made in these markets.  
For example, current political instability in the Middle East has caused uncertainty in the region, which 
could affect our results of operations in the region.  Also, certain international customers require longer 
payment terms, increasing our credit risk.  As we expand internationally, these risks will become more 
pertinent to us and could have a bigger impact on our business. 

17 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
We operate in a highly competitive environment that is subject to rapid change and we must 
continue to invest and adapt to remain competitive. 

Our businesses operate in highly competitive markets.  These markets continue to change in response to 
technological innovations and other factors.  Profitability is affected by developments in our markets 
beyond our control, including: changing U.S. federal and state standards for educational materials; rising 
development costs due to customers’ requirements for more customized instructional materials and 
assessment programs; changes in prevailing educational and testing methods and philosophies; higher 
technology costs due to the trend toward delivering more educational content in both traditional print and 
electronic formats; market acceptance of new technology products, including online or computer-based 
testing; an increase in the amount of materials given away in the K-12 markets as part of a bundled pack; 
the impact of the expected increase in turnover of K-12 teachers and instructors on the market 
acceptance of our products; customer consolidation in the retail and wholesale trade book market and the 
increased dependence on fewer but stronger customers; rising advances for popular authors and market 
pressures to maintain competitive retail pricing; a material increase in product returns or in certain costs 
such as paper; and overall uncertain economic issues that affect all markets. 

We cannot predict with certainty the changes that may occur and the effect of those changes on the 
competitiveness of our businesses, and the acceleration of any of these developments may materially 
and adversely affect our profitability.  

The means of delivering our products may be subject to rapid technological change.  Although we have 
undertaken several initiatives and invested significant amounts of capital to adapt to and benefit from 
these changes, we cannot predict whether technological innovations will, in the future, make some of our 
products, particularly those printed in traditional formats, wholly or partially obsolete.  If this were to occur, 
we might be required to invest significant resources to further adapt to the changing competitive 
environment.  In addition, we cannot predict whether end customers will have sufficient funding to 
purchase the equipment needed to use our new technology products.  

In order to maintain a competitive position, we must continue to invest in new offerings and new ways to 
deliver our products and services.  These investments may not be profitable or may be less profitable 
than what we have experienced historically.  We could experience threats to our existing businesses from 
the rise of new competitors due to the rapidly changing environment within which we operate. 

Our ability to enforce our intellectual property and proprietary rights may be limited, which may 
harm our competitive position and materially and adversely affect our business and results of 
operations. 

Our products are largely comprised of intellectual property content delivered through a variety of media, 
including books and digital and web-based media.  We rely on copyright, trademark and other intellectual 
property laws to establish and protect our proprietary rights in these products.  However, we cannot make 
assurances that our proprietary rights will not be challenged, invalidated or circumvented.  We conduct 
business in other countries where the extent of effective legal protection for intellectual property rights is 
uncertain, and this uncertainty could affect future growth.  Moreover, despite the existence of copyright 
and trademark protection under applicable laws, third parties may nonetheless violate our intellectual 
property rights, and our ability to remedy such violations, particularly in foreign countries, may be limited.  
In addition, the copying and distribution of content over the Internet creates additional challenges for us in 
protecting our proprietary rights.  If we are unable to adequately protect and enforce our intellectual 
property and proprietary rights, our competitive position may be harmed and our business and financial 
results could be materially and adversely affected. 

We operate in markets which are dependent on Information Technology (“IT”) systems and 
technological change. 

Our business is dependent on information technology.  We either provide software and/or internet based 
services to our customers or we use complex IT systems and products to support our business activities, 

18 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
particularly in infrastructure and as we move our products and services to an increasingly digital delivery 
platform. 

We face several technological risks associated with software product development and service delivery in 
our educational businesses, information technology security (including virus and hacker attacks), e-
commerce, enterprise resource planning, system implementations and upgrades.  The failure to recruit 
and retain staff with relevant skills may constrain our ability to grow as we combine traditional publishing 
products with online service offerings. 

We are reliant on third-party software development as part of our digital platform. 

Some of the technologies and software that compose our instruction and assessment technologies are 
developed by third parties.  We are reliant on those third parties for the development of future 
components and modules.  Thus, we face risks associated with software product development and the 
ability of those third parties to meet our needs and their obligations under our contracts with them. 

A major data privacy breach or unanticipated IT system failure may cause reputational damage to 
our brands and financial loss. 

Across our businesses we hold large volumes of personal data, including that of employees, customers 
and students.  Failure to adequately protect personal data could lead to penalties, significant remediation 
costs, reputational damage, potential cancellation of existing contracts and inability to compete for future 
business.  We have policies, processes, internal controls and cybersecurity mechanisms to ensure the 
stability of our information technology, provide security from unauthorized access to our systems and 
maintain business continuity, but our operating results may be adversely impacted by unanticipated 
system failures, data corruption or breaches in security. 

We may not be able to complete, or achieve the expected benefits from, any future acquisitions, 
which could materially and adversely affect our growth. 

We have at times used acquisitions as a means of expanding our business and expect that we will 
continue to do so.  If we do not successfully integrate acquisitions, anticipated operating advantages and 
cost savings may not be realized.  The acquisition and integration of companies involve a number of 
risks, including: use of available cash, new borrowings or borrowings under our accounts receivable 
securitization facility to consummate the acquisition; demands on management related to the increase in 
our size after an acquisition; diversion of management’s attention from existing operations to the 
integration of acquired companies; integration of companies existing systems into our systems; difficulties 
in the assimilation and retention of employees; and potential adverse effects on our operating results.  

We may not be able to maintain the levels of operating efficiency that acquired companies achieved 
separately.  Successful integration of acquired operations will depend upon our ability to manage those 
operations and to eliminate redundant and excess costs.  We may not be able to achieve the cost savings 
and other benefits that we would hope to achieve from acquisitions, which could materially and adversely 
affect our financial condition and results. 

We may not be able to retain or attract the key management, creative, editorial and sales 
personnel that we need to remain competitive and grow. 

Our success depends, in part, on our ability to continue to retain key management and other personnel.  
We operate in a number of highly visible industry segments where there is intense competition for 
experienced and highly effective individuals, including authors.  Our successful operations in these 
segments may increase the market visibility of members of key management, creative and editorial teams 
and result in their recruitment by other businesses.  There can be no assurance that we can continue to 
attract and retain the necessary talented employees, including executive officers and other key members 
of management and, if we fail to do so, it could adversely affect our business.   

19 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
In addition, our sales personnel make up about approximately 24% of our employees, and our business 
results depend largely upon the experience, knowledge of local market dynamics and long-standing 
customer relationships of such personnel.  Our inability to retain or hire effective sales people at 
economically reasonable compensation levels could materially and adversely affect our ability to operate 
profitably and grow our business. 

A significant increase in operating costs and expenses could have a material adverse effect on 
our profitability. 

Our major expenses include employee compensation and printing, paper and distribution costs for 
product-related manufacturing.  We offer competitive salary and benefit packages in order to attract and 
retain the quality employees required to grow and expand our businesses.  Compensation costs are 
influenced by general economic factors, including those affecting the cost of health insurance and 
postretirement benefits, and any trends specific to the employee skill sets we require.  We could 
experience changes in pension costs and funding requirements due to poor investment returns and/or 
changes in pension laws and regulations. 

Paper prices fluctuate based on the worldwide demand and supply for paper in general and for the 
specific types of paper used by us.  Paper is one of our principal raw materials and, for the year ended 
December 31, 2012, our paper purchases totaled approximately $47 million while our manufacturing 
costs totaled approximately $234 million.  Our books and workbooks are printed by third parties and we 
typically have multi-year contracts for the production of books and workbooks in order to reduce price 
fluctuations over the contract term.  Increases in any of our operating costs and expenses could 
materially and adversely affect our profitability and our results of operations. 

We make significant investments in information technology data centers and other technology initiatives 
as well as significant investments in the development of programs for the K-12 marketplace.  Although we 
believe we are prudent in our investment strategies and execution of our implementation plans, there is 
no assurance as to the ultimate recoverability of these investments. 

Exposure to litigation could have a material effect on our financial position and results of 
operations. 

We are involved in legal actions and claims arising from our business practices and face the risk that 
additional actions and claims will be filed in the future.  Litigation alleging infringement of copyrights and 
other intellectual property rights has become extensive in the educational publishing industry.  At present, 
there are various suits pending or threatened which claim that we exceeded the print run limitation or 
other restrictions in licenses granted to us to reproduce photographs in our textbooks.  A number of 
similar claims against us have already been settled.  While management does not expect any of these 
matters to have a material adverse effect on our results of operations, financial position or cash flows, 
due to the inherent uncertainty of the litigation process, the resolution of any particular legal proceeding or 
change in applicable legal standards could have a material effect on our financial position and results of 
operations.  

We have insurance in such amounts and with such coverage and deductibles as management believes is 
reasonable.  However, there can be no assurance that our liability insurance will cover all events or that 
the limits of coverage will be sufficient to fully cover all potential liabilities. 

Operational disruption to our business caused by a major disaster and/or external threats could 
restrict our ability to supply products and services to our customers. 

Across all our businesses, we manage complex operational and logistical arrangements including 
distribution centers, data centers and large office facilities as well as relationships with third party print 
vendors.  We have also outsourced some support functions, including application maintenance support, 
to third party providers.  Failure to recover from a major disaster (such as fire, flood or other natural 
disaster) at a key facility or the disruption of supply from a key third party vendor or partner (for example, 

20 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
due to bankruptcy) could restrict our ability to service our customers.  External threats, such as terrorist 
attacks, strikes, weather and political upheaval, could affect our business and employees, disrupting our 
daily business activities. 

We are subject to contingent liabilities that may affect liquidity and our ability to meet our 
obligations. 

In the ordinary course of business, we issue performance-related surety bonds and letters of credit 
posted as security for our operating activities, some of which obligate us to make payments if we fail to 
perform under certain contracts in connection with the sale of textbooks and assessment tests.  The 
surety bonds are partially backstopped by letters of credit.  As of December 31, 2012, our contingent 
liability for all letters of credit was approximately $26.2 million, of which $6.4 million were issued to 
backstop $11.7 million of surety bonds.  The letters of credit reduce the borrowing availability on our 
Revolving Credit Facility, which could affect liquidity and, therefore, our ability to meet our obligations.  
We may increase the number and amount of contracts that require the use of letters of credit, which may 
further restrict liquidity and, therefore, our ability to meet our obligations in the future. 

We may be adversely affected by significant changes in interest rates. 

Our new financing indebtedness, including borrowings under a revolver, bears interest at variable rates.  
We have $248.1 million of aggregate principal amount indebtedness outstanding under our Term Loan 
that bears interest at a variable rate.  An increase or decrease of 1% in the interest rate will change our 
interest expense by approximately $2.5 million on an annual basis.  We also have up to $250.0 million of 
borrowing availability, subject to borrowing base availability, under our Revolving Credit Facility, and 
borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facility bear interest at a variable rate.  Assuming that the 
Revolving Credit Facility is fully drawn, an increase or decrease of 1% in the interest rate will change our 
interest expense associated with the Revolving Credit Facility by $2.5 million on an annual basis. 
If market interest rates increase, variable-rate debt will create higher debt service requirements, which 
could adversely affect our cash flow.  While we may enter into agreements limiting exposure to higher 
interest rates, these agreements may not offer complete protection from this risk. 

We may not be able to generate sufficient cash to service all of our indebtedness and may be 
forced to take other actions to satisfy our obligations under our indebtedness, which may not be 
successful. 

Our ability to make scheduled payments or to refinance our debt obligations and to fund planned capital 
expenditures and other growth initiatives depends on our financial and operating performance, which is 
subject to prevailing economic and competitive conditions and to certain financial, business and other 
factors beyond our control. We may not be able to maintain a level of cash flow from operating activities 
sufficient to permit us to pay the principal, premium, if any, and interest on our indebtedness or to fund 
our other liquidity needs. 

If our cash flows and capital resources are insufficient to fund our debt service obligations, we may be 
forced to reduce or delay capital expenditures, sell assets, seek additional capital or seek to restructure or 
refinance our indebtedness. These alternative measures may not be successful and may not permit us to 
meet our scheduled debt service obligations. In the absence of such operating results and resources, we 
could face substantial liquidity problems and might be required to sell material assets or operations to 
attempt to meet our debt service and other obligations. Our Term Loan and Revolving Credit Facility 
restrict our ability to use the proceeds from asset sales. We may not be able to consummate those asset 
sales to raise capital or sell assets at prices that we believe are fair and proceeds that we do receive may 
not be adequate to meet any debt service obligations then due.  

21 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Despite our current leverage, we may still be able to incur substantially more debt. This could 
further exacerbate the risks that we and our subsidiaries face. 

We and our subsidiaries may be able to incur substantial additional indebtedness, including additional 
secured indebtedness, in the future. The terms of the credit agreements do and the agreements 
governing our existing and future indebtedness may restrict, but will not completely prohibit, us from doing 
so.  As of December 31, 2012, we had approximately $185.9 million of borrowing availability under our 
Revolving Credit Facility.  This may have the effect of reducing the amount of proceeds paid to you in the 
event of a liquidation. If new debt or other liabilities are added to our current debt levels, the related risks 
that we and our subsidiaries now face could intensify.  

A small group of stockholders own a substantial percentage of our common stock, and their 
interests could conflict with yours. 

As of December 31, 2012, a small group of stockholders and their affiliates, including Paulson & Co Inc., 
Anchorage Advisors L.L.C., Blackrock Financial Management, Inc., Avenue Investments, L.P., Q 
Investments L.P., Oak Hill Advisors L.P. and Lehman Commercial Paper, Inc., beneficially owned in the 
aggregate approximately 73% of the outstanding shares of our common stock.  In addition, affiliates of 
Paulson & Co. Inc. currently have the right to nominate two directors to the board of directors so long as 
they own 25% or more of the Company’s stock. 

There can be no assurance as to the liquidity of the trading market for the common stock or that a 
trading market for such securities will develop. 

Our common stock is not listed on any securities exchange.  This may negatively affect the value and the 
pricing of the common stock in the secondary market, the transparency and availability of trading prices, 
and the liquidity of such securities.  As a result, holders of such securities may be unable to resell such 
securities at an acceptable price or at all.   

We may record future goodwill or indefinite-lived intangibles impairment charges related to one or 
more of our business units, which could materially adversely impact our results of operations. 

We test our goodwill and indefinite-lived intangibles asset balances for impairment during the fourth 
quarter of each year, or more frequently if indicators are present or changes in circumstances suggest 
that impairment may exist.  We assess goodwill for impairment at the reporting unit level and, in 
evaluating the potential for impairment of goodwill, we make assumptions regarding estimated revenue 
projections, growth rates, cash flows and discount rates.  Although we use consistent methodologies in 
developing the assumptions and estimates underlying the fair value calculations used in our impairment 
tests, these estimates are uncertain by nature and can vary from actual results. Declines in the future 
performance and cash flows of the reporting unit or small changes in other key assumptions may result 
future goodwill impairment charges, which could materially adversely impact our results of operations.  
We have goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets of approximately $520.1 million and $440.5 
million, $520.1 million and $440.8 million as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.  There was no 
goodwill impairment charge for the year ended December 31, 2012.  For the year ended December 31, 
2011, goodwill impairment charges were $1,442.5 million.  For the years ended December 31, 2012 and 
2011, impairment charges for indefinite-lived intangible assets were $5.0 million and $161.0 million, 
respectively.    

Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments 

Not applicable. 

22 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 2. Properties 

Our principal executive office is located at 222 Berkeley Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02116. The 
following table describes the approximate building areas in square feet, principal uses and the years of 
expiration on leased premises of our significant operating properties as of December 31, 2012. We 
believe that these properties are suitable and adequate for our present and anticipated business needs, 
satisfactory for the uses to which each is put, and, in general, fully utilized. 

Location   

     Expiration year    Approximate area    Principal use of space  

Segment used by 

Owned Premises: 
Indianapolis, Indiana. . . . . . Owned  
Troy, Missouri . . . . . . . . . . . Owned  
Bellmawr, New Jersey . . . . .Owned  

Leased Premises: 
Orlando, Florida . . . . . . . . .  2019  
Evanston, Illinois . . . . . . . . . 2017  
Rolling Meadows, Illinois . . . 2015  
Geneva, Illinois . . . . . . . . . . 2019  
Wilmington, 
Massachusetts . . . . . . . . . .  2015  
Boston, Massachusetts . . . . 2017  
(Corporate offices) 
Portsmouth, New 
Hampshire . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2017  
New York, New York . . . . .  2016  
Lewisville, Texas . . . . . . . .  2013  
Austin, Texas . . . . . . . . . . . 2016  
Dublin, Ireland . . . . . . . . . .  2025  
Rancho Cucamonga, 
California         . . . . . . . . . .  2015  
Englewood, Colorado  . . . .  2014  
Orlando, Florida . . . . . . . . .  2016  
Kennesaw, Georgia . . . . . .  2015  
Itasca, Illinois   . . . . . . . . . .  2016  

All segments 
491,779   Warehouse   
575,000  Office and warehouse   
Education  
380,000   Warehouse                       Education 

Office  
250,842  
Office  
150,050  
112,014  
Office  
485,989 Office and warehouse    

Education  
Education  
Education  
Education  

  40,602 
328,686  

Office  
Office  

Office  
  20,645  
Office  
  28,704  
434,898 Office and warehouse    
Office  
195,230  
Office  
  39,944  

All segments 
All segments 

Education  

Education  
Education  
Education  

          Trade  

Office  
Office  

  13,346  
  17,024  
  25,400   Warehouse                  Corporate Records Ctr. 
  59,450   Warehouse   
  46,823   Warehouse   

Education 
Education  

Education  
Education  

In addition, we lease several other offices that are not material to our operations and, in some instances, 
are either currently vacant due to consolidating our operations or are fully sublet. 

23 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 3. Legal Proceedings 

We are involved in ordinary and routine litigation and matters incidental to our business. Specifically, 
there have been various settled, pending and threatened litigation that allege we exceeded the print run 
limitation or other restrictions in licenses granted to us to reproduce photographs in our textbooks. While 
management believes that there is a reasonable possibility we may incur a loss associated with the 
pending and threatened litigation, we are not able to estimate such amount, but we do not expect any of 
these matters to have a material adverse effect on our results of operations, financial position or cash 
flows.  We have insurance in such amounts and with such coverage and deductibles as management 
believes is reasonable. There can be no assurance that our liability insurance will cover all events or that 
the limits of coverage will be sufficient to fully cover all liabilities. 

Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures 

Not applicable.   

Item 5. Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and 
Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities 

Market Information 

Not applicable.  There is no established trading market for our common stock.    

Holders 

There were approximately 190 holders of our common stock as of February 28, 2013.   

Dividends  

We paid no dividends to the holders of our common stock in the years ended December 31, 2012 and 
2011, respectively.  The credit agreement governing our revolving credit facility restricts our ability to pay 
dividends to the holders of our common stock. 

24 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 6. Selected Financial Data 

( in $ 0 0 0 s )

O pe ra t ing D a t a

2 0 12

2 0 11

F o r t he  P e rio d F o r t he  P e rio d

M a rc h 10 ,
2 0 10  t o
D e c e m be r 3 1, 
2 0 10

J a nua ry 1,
2 0 10  t o
M a rc h 9 , 
2 0 10

2 0 0 9

2 0 0 8

Net sales
Gro ss pro fit
Impairment charge fo r go o dwill, intangible assets,
     pre-publicatio n co sts and fixed assets
Operating lo ss
Lo ss befo re reo rganizatio n items and taxes
Reo rganizatio n items, net
Net lo ss

$           

1,285,641
454,217

$        

1,295,295
375,230

$                 

1,397,142
420,051

$                    

109,905
(21,624)

$   

1,562,415
400,189

$   

2,049,254
640,075

8,003
(120,687)
(242,196)
(149,114)
(87,139)

1,674,164
(2,037,130)
(2,282,523)

-

(2,182,370)

103,933
(327,868)
(495,798)

-

(507,727)

4,028
(146,697)
(311,996)
-
(311,776)

953,587
(1,392,268)
(2,206,540)

-

824,009
(1,102,786)
(1,858,724)

-

(2,145,147)

(1,463,842)

B a la nc e  S he e t  D a t a

2 0 12

2 0 11

2 0 10

2 0 0 9

2 0 0 8

Wo rking capital
Cash, cash equivalents and 
     sho rt-term investments
To tal assets
Debt (sho rt-term and lo ng-term)
Sto ckho lders' equity (deficit)

$            

599,085

$          

440,844

$                   

380,678

$     

(570,115)

$      

274,643

475,119
3,029,584
248,125
1,943,701

413,610
3,263,903
3,011,588
(674,552)

397,740
5,257,155
2,861,594
1,517,828

94,002
5,295,149
6,953,629
(2,614,736)

153,408
7,013,611
6,257,316
(856,060)

The financial information presented above for the years ended December 31, 2012, December 31, 2011 
and the period from March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010 represents the results of operations of HMH 
Holdings and its consolidated subsidiaries, and the financial information presented above for the period 
from January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 and for the years ended December 31, 2009 and December 31, 
2008, represents the results of operations of HMH Publishing, our predecessor, and its consolidated 
subsidiaries. 

25 

 
 
 
               
            
                      
                       
        
        
                   
           
                      
                          
       
        
              
        
                   
                    
   
     
              
       
                   
                     
  
    
                
                      
                              
                              
                
                  
                
        
                   
                     
    
    
                
              
                     
         
         
           
         
                  
    
        
               
           
                  
   
      
             
           
                   
   
       
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and 
Results of Operations 

The following Management’s Discussion and Analysis (“MD&A”) is intended to facilitate an understanding 
of our results of operations and financial condition.  

This MD&A is provided as a supplement to, and should be read in conjunction with, our consolidated 
financial statements and the accompanying notes (“Financial Statements”) for the years ended December 
31, 2012, 2011 and 2010.  The following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of 
operations contains forward-looking statements about our business, operations and industry that involve 
risks and uncertainties, such as statements regarding our plans, objectives, expectations and intentions.  
See “Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Statements.” 

Overview 

We are a leading provider of educational content, technology and professional services to the elementary 
and secondary school market in the United States, including a full range of comprehensive curriculum, 
supplemental products and service offerings.  We have a long-standing expertise in teaching and 
instructional strategy and the design and creation of print and electronic learning materials across all 
grade levels.  We distribute our solutions in multiple formats, including print and digital curriculum, 
technology platforms, assessment tools and services.  We believe our solutions are a mission critical tool 
for school systems as they increasingly focus on outcomes-based learning and teaching solutions that 
reach students both in the classroom and at home.  We believe we are a leader in the transformation of 
the traditional educational materials market and have the opportunity to increase net sales and 
profitability by selling our innovative solutions through a comprehensive and integrated approach to 
educating children.  Furthermore, since 1832, we have published trade and reference materials including 
award-winning adult and children’s books, fiction, and nonfiction. 

Recent Developments 

Chapter 11 Reorganization 
On May 10, 2012, we entered into a Plan Support Agreement with consenting creditors holding greater 
than 74% of the principal amount of the outstanding senior secured indebtedness of the Company and 
with equity owners holding approximately 64% of the Company’s outstanding common stock.  The 
consenting creditors agreed to support the Company’s Pre-Packaged Chapter 11 Plan of Reorganization 
(“Plan”).  Pursuant to the Plan Support Agreement, the Company agreed to use its best efforts to (i) 
support and complete the restructuring and all transactions contemplated by the Plan, (ii) take any and all 
necessary and appropriate actions in furtherance of the restructuring contemplated under the Plan, (iii) 
complete the restructuring and all transactions contemplated under the Plan within set time-frames, (iv) 
obtain any and all required regulatory and/or third-party approvals for the restructuring, and (v) not directly 
or indirectly, seek, solicit, support, or engage in the negotiation or formulation of alternate plans of 
reorganization that were inconsistent with the reorganization as contemplated by the Plan Support 
Agreement. 

On May 21, 2012 (the “Petition Date”), the U.S. based entities that borrowed or guaranteed the debt of 
the Company (collectively the “Debtors”), filed voluntary petitions for relief under Chapter 11 of the federal 
bankruptcy laws in the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York (“Court”).  
Concurrently therewith, the Debtors also filed the Plan, the Disclosure Statement in support of the Plan 
and filed various motions seeking relief to continue operations.  Following the Petition Date, the Debtors 
operated their business as “debtors in possession” (“DIP”) under the jurisdiction of the Court and in 
accordance with the applicable provisions of the Bankruptcy Code and orders of the Court.  Under 
Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code (“Chapter 11”), certain claims against us in existence 
before the Petition Date were stayed while we operated our business as a DIP including any actions that 
might be commenced with regards to secured claims, although the holders of such claims had the right to 
move the Court for relief from the stay.  Subsequent to the Petition Date, these claims were reflected in 

26 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
the balance sheet as liabilities subject to compromise.  Secured claims were secured primarily by liens on 
the Company’s accounts receivable.  Additional claims (liabilities subject to compromise) could have 
potentially arisen after the filing date resulting from rejection of executory contracts or from the 
determination by the Court (or agreed to by parties in interest).   

On June 22, 2012, the Company successfully emerged from bankruptcy as a reorganized company 
pursuant to the Plan.  Ultimately, the Debtors did not reject any executory contracts during the bankruptcy 
case, and the Company continues to review and reconcile claims that were filed against it by creditors.       

Subsequent to the Petition Date, the provisions in U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles 
guidance for reorganizations applied to the Company’s financial statements while it operated under the 
provisions of Chapter 11.  The accounting guidance did not change the application of generally accepted 
accounting principles in the preparation of financial statements.  However, it does require that the 
financial statements, for periods including and subsequent to the filing of the Chapter 11 petition, 
distinguish transactions and events that are directly associated with the reorganization from the ongoing 
operations of the business.  Accordingly, all transactions (including, but not limited to, all professional 
fees, realized gains and losses and provisions for losses) directly associated with the reorganization and 
restructuring of our businesses are reported separately in the financial statements.  All such expense or 
income amounts are reported in reorganization items in the accompanying consolidated statements of 
operations for the year ended December 31, 2012.     

Summary of Emergence 
On June 22, 2012, the Company successfully emerged from bankruptcy as a reorganized company 
pursuant to the Plan after voluntarily filing for bankruptcy on May 21, 2012.  The financial restructuring 
realized by the confirmation of the Plan was accomplished through a debt-for-equity exchange.  The Plan 
deleveraged the Company’s balance sheet by eliminating the Company’s secured indebtedness in 
exchange for new equity in the Company.  Existing stockholders, in their capacity as stockholders, 
received warrants for the new equity in the Company in exchange for the existing equity.   

Upon the Company’s emergence from Chapter 11 bankruptcy proceedings on June 22, 2012, the 
Company was not required to apply fresh-start accounting based on U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting 
Principles guidance for reorganizations due to the fact that the pre-petition holders who owned more than 
50% of the Company’s outstanding common stock immediately before confirmation of the Plan received 
more than 50% of the Company’s outstanding common stock upon emergence.  Accordingly, a new 
reporting entity was not created for accounting purposes. 

Below is a summary of the significant transactions affecting the Company’s capital structure as a result of 
the effectiveness of the Plan. 

Equity Transactions 
On June 22, 2012, pursuant to the Plan, all of the issued and outstanding shares of common stock of the 
Company, including all options, warrants or any other agreements to acquire shares of common stock of 
the Company that existed prior to the Petition Date, were cancelled and in exchange, holders of such 
interests received distributions pursuant to the terms of the Plan.  Following the emergence on June 22, 
2012, the authorized capital stock of the Company consists of (i) 190,000,000 shares of common stock, of 
which 69,958,989 shares of common stock are issued and outstanding at December 31, 2012, 3,684,211 
shares of common stock which are reserved for issuance upon exercise of warrants at December 31, 
2012, and 8,187,135 shares of common stock which are reserved for issuance upon exercise of certain 
other warrants and awards to be issued by the Company at December 31, 2012 under the MIP (defined 
below) and (ii) 10,000,000 shares of preferred stock, $0.01 par value per share, of which no shares are 
issued and outstanding at December 31, 2012.  There are no other outstanding obligations, warrants, 
options, or other rights to subscribe for or purchase from the Company any class of capital stock of the 
Company.      

27 

 
 
 
 
 
On June 22, 2012, the Company issued an aggregate of 70,000,000 post-emergence shares of new 
common stock pursuant to the final Plan on a pro rata basis to the holders of the then-existing first lien 
term loan (the “Term Loan”), of which 41,011 are treasury shares as of December 31, 2012, the then-
existing first lien revolving loan facility (the “Revolving Loan”), and the 10.5% Senior Secured Notes due 
2019 (the “10.5% Senior Notes”) as of the Petition Date.  The Company relied on Section 1145(a)(1) of 
the Bankruptcy Code to exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the 
issuance of such new common stock.   

A new Management Incentive Plan (“MIP”) became effective upon emergence.  The MIP provides for 
grants of options and restricted stock at a strike price equal to or greater than the fair market value per 
share of common stock as of the date of the grant and reserved for management and employees up to 
10% of the new common stock of the Company.  During 2012, the Company granted to certain 
employees, including executive officers, stock options totaling 4,912,281 shares of the Company’s 
common stock.  Each of the stock options granted have an exercise price equal to the fair market value 
on the date of grant and generally vest over a three or four year period.  During 2012, the Company 
granted 22,200 restricted stock units to independent directors, which generally vest after one year.  As of 
December 31, 2012, there are 3,252,654 shares remaining which are reserved for issuance under the 
MIP.  

In accordance with the Plan, each existing common stockholder prior to bankruptcy received its pro rata 
share of warrants to purchase 5% of the common stock of the Company, subject to dilution for equity 
awards issued in connection with the MIP.  The exercise price for the warrants is based upon a $3.1 
billion enterprise valuation of the Company, and the warrants have a term of seven years.  All of the then-
existing common stock was extinguished on the effective date of the Plan.  As of December 31, 2012, 
there are 3,684,211 shares reserved for issuance upon the exercise of such warrants.  These warrants 
are referred to as the “New Warrants.”    

Debt Transactions 
On June 22, 2012, the Company’s creditors converted the First Lien Credit Agreement consisting of the 
Term Loan with an aggregate outstanding principal balance of $2.6 billion and the Revolving Loan with an 
aggregate outstanding principal balance of $235.8 million, and the outstanding $300.0 million principal 
amount of 10.5% Senior Notes to 100 percent pro rata ownership of the Company’s common stock, 
subject to dilution pursuant to the MIP and the exercise of the New Warrants, and received $30.3 million 
in cash. 

In connection with the Chapter 11 filing on May 22, 2012, the Company entered into a new $500.0 million 
senior secured credit facility (DIP facility), which converted into an exit facility on the effective date of the 
emergence from Chapter 11.  This exit facility consists of a $250.0 million revolving credit facility, which is 
secured by the Company’s accounts receivable and inventory, and a $250.0 million term loan credit 
facility.  The proceeds of the exit facility were used to fund the costs of the reorganization and are 
providing working capital to the Company since its emergence from Chapter 11.    

28 

 
 
           
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A summary of the transactions affecting the Company’s debt balances is as follows: 

Debt balance prior to emergence from bankruptcy (including accrued interest)

Exchange of debt for new common shares
Elimination of debt discount and deferred financing fees
Adequate protection payments
Conversion fees
Professional fees

(Gain) loss on extinguishment

$          

$          

(3,142,234)
1,750,000
98,352
69,701
30,299
21,726
(1,172,156)

Reorganization Items 
Reorganization items represent expense or income amounts that were recorded in the consolidated 
financial statements as a result of the bankruptcy proceedings.  Reorganization items were incurred 
starting with the date of the bankruptcy filing through the date of bankruptcy emergence.  The gain from 
reorganization items for the year ended December 31, 2012 were as follows: 

Debt to equity conversion
Elimination of debt discount and deferred financing fees
Adequate protection payments
Conversion fees
Professional fees

(Gain) loss on extinguishment

Stock compensation
Issuance of warrants

Reorganization items, net

Total

$         

(1,392,234)
98,352
69,701
30,299
21,726
(1,172,156)

2,027
10,747
(1,159,382)

$          

Adjusted to
Capital in excess
of par value

Reorganization
items, net

$            

(1,199,549)
84,740
60,054
26,106
18,381
(1,010,268)

$           

(192,685)
13,612
9,647
4,193
3,345
(161,888)

-
-

$             

(1,010,268)

2,027
10,747
(149,114)

$            

Liabilities Subject to Compromise 
Certain pre-petition liabilities and indebtedness were subject to compromise under the Plan and were 
reported at amounts allowed or expected to be allowed by the Court.  A summary of liabilities subject to 
compromise reflected in the consolidated balance sheet as of May 21, 2012 is as follows: 

May 21,
2012

$             

$             

2,570,815
235,751
300,000
35,668
3,142,234

$2,668,690 Term Loan due June 12, 2014
$235,751 Revolving Loan due December 12, 2013
$300,000 10.5% senior secured notes due June 1, 2019
Accrued interest
Total

As of December 31, 2012, there were no liabilities subject to compromise. 

29 

 
            
                 
                 
                 
                 
 
                
                   
                
                
                   
                 
                
                   
                 
                
                   
                 
           
              
             
                  
                        
                 
                
                        
                
 
                  
                  
                    
 
All pre-petition claims were considered liabilities subject to compromise at May 21, 2012.  As discussed 
above, the Term Loan, the Revolving Loan, the 10.5% Senior Notes, and the associated accrued interest 
were exchanged for new common stock in the Company.  There were no other liabilities subject to 
compromise as of May 21, 2012.  We honored other prepetition obligations, including employee wages 
and trade payables in the ordinary course of business. 

Seasonality and Comparability 

Our net sales, operating profit and operating cash flow are impacted by the inherent seasonality of the 
academic calendar.  Consequently, the performance of our businesses may not be comparable quarter to 
consecutive quarter and should be considered on the basis of results for the whole year or by comparing 
results in a quarter with results in the same quarter for the previous year. 

In the K-12 market, we typically receive payments for products and services from individual school 
districts, and, to a lesser extent, individual schools and states.  In the trade publishing markets, payment 
is received for products and services from book distributors and retail booksellers.  In the case of testing 
and assessment products and services, payment is received from the individually contracted parties. 

Approximately 88% of our fiscal 2012 net sales were derived from educational publishing, which is a 
markedly seasonal business.  Schools make most of their purchases in the second and third quarters of 
the calendar year in preparation for the beginning of the school year.  Thus, over the past three years, 
approximately 69% of consolidated net sales have historically been realized in the second and third 
quarters.  Sales of K-12 instructional materials and customized testing products are also cyclical, with 
some years offering more sales opportunities than others.  The amount of funding available at the state 
level for educational materials also has a significant effect on year-to-year net sales.  Although the loss of 
a single customer would not have a material adverse effect on our business, schedules of school 
adoptions and market acceptance of our products can materially affect year-to-year net sales 
performance. 

30 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Presentation 
The historical financial information discussed in this annual report has been derived from the financial 
statements and accounting records of HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. (“Successor”) for periods on and 
after March 10, 2010 and from the financial statements and accounting records of HMH Publishing 
Company (“Predecessor”) for the period from January 1, 2010 through March 9, 2010. For purposes of 
presenting a comparison of our 2011 results to 2010, we have presented our 2010 results as the 
mathematical addition of the Predecessor and Successor periods (the “Combined Period”). We believe 
that this presentation provides meaningful information about our results of operations. This approach is 
not consistent with U.S. GAAP, may yield results that are not strictly comparable on a period-to-period 
basis and may not reflect the actual results we would have achieved.  The table showing the combined 
2010 results follows: 

(in thousands)

Successor
For the Period
March 10 -
December 31, 
2010

Predecessor
For the Period
January 1, -
March 9,
2010

Combined
For the Period
January 1, -
December 31, 
2010

Net sales

$       

1,397,142

$             

109,905

$       

1,507,047

Costs and expenses
Cost of sales, excluding pre-publication and publishing 
 rights amortization
Publishing rights amortization
Pre-publication amortization

Cost of sales

Selling and administrative
Other intangible asset amortization
Impairment charge for goodwill, intangible assets, 
pre-publication costs and fixed assets
Severance and other charges
Gain on sale of assets

Operating loss

Other income (expense)
Interest expense
Other (loss) income, net
Change in fair value of derivative instruments

Loss before taxes

Income tax expense (benefit)
Net loss

559,593
235,977
181,521
977,091
598,807
57,601

103,933
(11,243)
(1,179)
1,725,010
(327,868)

45,270
48,336
37,923
131,529
119,039
2,006

4,028
-
-
256,602
(146,697)

604,863
284,313
219,444
1,108,620
717,846
59,607

107,961
(11,243)
(1,179)
1,981,612
(474,565)

(258,174)
(6)
90,250
(167,930)
(495,798)
11,929
(507,727)

$         

(157,947)
9
(7,361)
(165,299)
(311,996)
(220)
(311,776)

$            

(416,121)
3
82,889
(333,229)
(807,794)
11,709
(819,503)

$         

31 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Operating Results 

(in thousands)

Net sales

Costs and expenses

Cost of sales, excluding pre-publication and publishing 

 rights amortization

Publishing rights amortization

Pre-publication amortization

Cost of sales

Selling and administrative

Other intangible asset amortization

Impairment charge for goodwill, intangible 
assets, pre-publication costs and fixed assets

Severance and other charges

Gain on bargain purchase

Gain on sale of assets

Operating loss

Other income (expense)

Interest expense

Change in fair value of derivative instruments

Loss before reorganization items and taxes

Reorganization items, net

Income tax expense (benefit)

Net loss

NM = not meaningful

Year

Ended

Year

Ended

December 31,

December 31,

2012

2011

Percent 

Change

$   

1,285,641

$      

1,295,295

-0.7%

515,948

177,747

137,729

831,424

533,462

54,815

8,003

9,375

(30,751)

-

512,612

230,624

176,829

920,065

640,023

67,372

1,674,164

32,801

-

(2,000)

0.7%

-22.9%

-22.1%

-9.6%

-16.6%

-18.6%

-99.5%

-71.4%

NM

NM

(120,687)

(2,037,130)

-94.1%

(123,197)

1,688

(242,196)

(149,114)

(5,943)

(244,582)

(811)

(2,282,523)

-

(100,153)

$       

(87,139)

$     

(2,182,370)

-49.6%

NM

-89.4%

NM

-94.1%

-96.0%

Results of Operations – Comparing Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 

Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012, decreased $9.7 million, or 0.7%, from $1,295.3 million 
for the same period in 2011 to $1,285.6 million.  The decrease was due to a $47.0 million decline in the 
domestic education sales from the prior year.  Our addressable new adoption and open territory sales 
were down from the prior year primarily due to known lower adoptions in 2012 coupled with a continuing 
decline in the open territory market.  The addressable adoption market was down approximately 23% 
when compared to prior year and the open territory market was down approximately 8%.  Offsetting a 
portion of the decline was a $31.4 million increase in our Trade sales primarily due to a number of best 
sellers and an increase in e-book sales.  

Operating loss for the year ended December 31, 2012 decreased $1,916.4 million, or 94.1%, from a loss 
of $2,037.1 million for the same period in 2011 to a loss of $120.7 million, primarily due to a 2011 goodwill 
impairment charge of $1,442.5 million.  The goodwill impairment was due to the carrying value of the 
Education reporting unit exceeding the implied fair value. Further, the increased loss in 2011 was also 
due to tradename and other impairments of $231.6 million.  Other significant components of the decrease 
in operating loss were as follows: 

32 

 
 
 
 
 
 
•  A $104.5 million decrease in amortization expense related to publishing rights, pre-publication 

and other intangible assets due to our use of accelerated amortization methods and lower plate 
spend over the past several years than earlier years;  

•  A $106.6 million decrease in selling and administrative expenses related primarily to a reduction 
in labor related costs of $32.0 million; a reduction in variable expenses such as commissions and 
depository fees of $11.0 million associated with lower revenue; lower travel and entertainment 
expenses of $11.0 million; with the remainder attributed to lower fixed and discretionary expenses 
such as rent, bad debt and professional fees; 

•  A $23.4 million decrease in severance and other charges as 2011 included a significant executive 

and workforce realignment; and  

•  A $30.8 million gain on bargain purchase associated with the acquisition of certain asset product 

lines for our Trade Publishing business. 

Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 decreased $121.4 million, or 49.6%, from 
$244.6 million for the same period in 2011 to $123.2 million, primarily as a result of the emergence from 
bankruptcy with substantially reduced debt.  Going forward, we expect our full year interest expense to 
approximate $25.0 million annually.   

Change in fair value of derivative instruments for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased $2.5 
million from an unrealized loss of $0.8 million for the same period in 2011 to an unrealized gain of $1.7 
million.  The increase was due to favorable euro currency fluctuations on our foreign exchange forward 
contracts.    

Reorganization items, net for the year ended December 31, 2012 was $149.1 million.  The amount 
represents expense and income amounts that were recorded to the statement of operations as a result of 
the bankruptcy proceedings.  Reorganization items were incurred starting with the date of the bankruptcy 
filing through the date of bankruptcy emergence.   

Income tax benefit for the year ended December 31, 2012 decreased $94.2 million from a tax benefit of 
$100.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 to a tax benefit of $5.9 million.  The full year 
effective tax rate for 2012 was 6.4% primarily due to a tax benefit allocated to continuing operations after 
considering the gain recorded in 2012 in equity as a result of the reorganization.  Such gain serves as a 
source of income that enables realization of the tax benefit of the current year loss in continuing 
operations.  This tax benefit in continuing operations is offset by the deferred tax liabilities associated with 
tax amortization on indefinite-lived intangibles as well as expected foreign, state and local taxes for 
2012. The full year effective tax rate for 2011 was approximately 4.4% due to the deferred tax benefit 
resulting from the decrease in deferred tax liabilities associated with book impairments on indefinite-lived 
intangibles and goodwill.    

33 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Operating Results 

(in thousands)

Net sales

Costs and expenses

Cost of sales, excluding pre-publication and publishing 

 rights amortization

Publishing rights amortization

Pre-publication amortization

Cost of sales

Selling and administrative

Other intangible asset amortization

Impairment charge for goodwill, intangible 
assets, pre-publication costs and fixed assets

Severance and other charges

Gain on sale of assets

Operating loss

Other income (expense)

Interest expense

Other (loss) income, net

Change in fair value of derivative instruments

Loss before taxes

Income tax expense (benefit)

Net loss

NM = not meaningful

Year

Ended

Combined

Year

Ended

December 31,

December 31,

2011

2010

Percent 

Change

$   

1,295,295

$   

1,507,047

-14.1%

512,612

230,624

176,829

920,065

640,023

67,372

1,674,164

32,801

(2,000)

(2,037,130)

604,863

284,313

219,444

1,108,620

717,846

59,607

107,961

(11,243)

(1,179)

(474,565)

-15.3%

-18.9%

-19.4%

-17.0%

-10.8%

13.0%

NM

NM

69.6%

329.3%

(244,582)

(416,121)

-41.2%

-

(811)

(2,282,523)

(100,153)

3

82,889

(807,794)

11,709

$  

(2,182,370)

$    

(819,503)

NM

NM

NM

NM

NM

Results of Operations – Comparing Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 

Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011, decreased $211.8 million, or 14.1%, from $1,507.0 
million for the same period in 2010 to $1,295.3 million.  The decline was largely driven by a reduction in 
the Texas adoption market by over $250 million from 2010 coupled with a decline in sales to open 
territories along with a decline in international sales.  Net sales for Texas for the year ended December 
31, 2011 was $72.0 million, approximately $119.0 million less than the same period in 2010.  Additionally, 
sales to open territories were approximately $61.0 million lower for the year ended 2011 compared to the 
same period in 2010 due primarily to the contraction of spending throughout most states.  Lastly, our 
international sales were $33.0 million lower in 2011 than 2010 due to a tightening of credit terms with our 
middle east distribution partners.    

Operating loss for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased $1,562.6 million, or 329.3%, from a 
loss of $474.6 million for the same period in 2010 to a loss of $2,037.1 million, primarily due to a goodwill 
impairment charge of $1,442.5 million.  The goodwill impairment was due to the carrying value of the 
Education reporting unit exceeding the implied fair value. Further, the increased loss was also due to 

34 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
tradename and other impairments of $231.6 million and $44.0 million increase in severance and other 
expenses and lower annual net sales partially offset by: 

•  A $88.5 million decrease in amortization expense related to publishing rights, pre-publication and 
other intangible assets due to our use of accelerated amortization methods and lower plate spend 
over the past several years than earlier years;  

•  A $77.8 million decrease in selling and administrative expenses related primarily to a reduction in 
variable expenses such as commissions and depository fees associated with lower revenue; and 

•  A $92.3 million decrease in cost of sales (excluding pre-publication and publishing rights 

amortization) due to a reduction of the inventory step up amortization of $41.7 million, which was 
included in 2010, along with lower net sales.   

Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 decreased $171.5 million, or 41.2%, from 
$416.1 million for the same period in 2010 to $244.6 million, primarily a result of the expiration of legacy 
swap agreements with unfavorable fixed interest rates and the conversion of $4.0 billion of debt to equity 
in March 2010 as part of the restructuring.  The components for the decline were: 

• 

In 2010, we paid $93.1 million related to the interest rate swap agreements in place at the time.  
The swap agreements, which were mandatory under our Credit Agreement, expired at December 
31, 2010;   

•  The Mezzanine debt, which bore interest at 17.5% through March 9, 2010, incurred $67.0 million 

in interest in 2010 that did not exist in 2011;   

•  A reduction of $5.1 million of deferred financing costs as a substantial amount of deferred 

financing fees that existed at March 9, 2010 were written off; and 

•  A reduction of $8.1 million related to the accounts receivable securitization facility as we had 
$140.0 million outstanding on the securitization facility from February 2010 through August 3, 
2010 and an average outstanding balance of $30.1 million for only two months during 2011. 

Change in fair value of derivative instruments for the year ended December 31, 2011 decreased 
$83.7 million from a gain of $82.9 million for the same period in 2010 to an unrealized loss of $0.8 million.  
The decrease was due to interest rate swap payments made during 2010, which effectively reduced the 
unrealized liability established on the balance sheet.  No interest rate swap agreements were in place 
during 2011.  The $0.8 million unrealized loss on change in fair value of derivative instruments related to 
unfavorable foreign exchange forward contracts in place during 2011.   

Income tax expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 decreased $111.9 million from an expense 
of $11.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 to a benefit of $100.2 million.  The full year 
effective tax rate for 2011 was approximately 4.4% due to the deferred tax benefit resulting from the 
decrease in deferred tax liabilities associated with book impairments on indefinite-lived intangibles and 
goodwill.  An income tax benefit was recorded in the fourth quarter of 2011 and was due primarily to the 
book impairment on indefinite-lived intangible assets and goodwill, which reduced the related deferred tax 
liabilities.     

35 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Non-GAAP Financial Measures 
To supplement our Financial Statements presented in accordance with accounting principles generally 
accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”), we have presented certain financial measures in 
addition to our GAAP results.  We believe that these non-GAAP financial measures provide useful 
information for evaluating our business performance.  This information should be considered as 
supplemental in nature and should not be considered in isolation or as a substitute for the related 
financial information prepared in accordance with GAAP.  In addition, these non-GAAP financial 
measures may not be the same as similarly entitled measures reported by other companies. 

We present the following non-GAAP financial measures in this report: 

Adjusted EBITDA  

Management believes that the presentation of Adjusted EBITDA provides useful information to investors 
regarding our results of operations because it assists both investors and management in analyzing and 
benchmarking the performance and value of our business.  Adjusted EBITDA provides an indicator of 
general economic performance that is not affected by debt restructurings, fluctuations in interest rates or 
effective tax rates, or levels of depreciation or amortization.  Accordingly, our management believes that 
this measurement is useful for comparing general operating performance from period to period.  
Furthermore, the agreements governing our indebtedness contain covenants and other tests based on 
Adjusted EBITDA.  In addition, targets and positive trends in Adjusted EBITDA are used as performance 
measures and to determine certain compensation of management. Other companies may define Adjusted 
EBITDA differently and, as a result, our measure of Adjusted EBITDA may not be directly comparable to 
Adjusted EBITDA of other companies.  Although we use Adjusted EBITDA as a financial measure to 
assess the performance of our business, the use of Adjusted EBITDA is limited because it does not 
include certain material costs, such as interest and taxes, necessary to operate our business. Adjusted 
EBITDA should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for, net earnings in accordance with 
GAAP as a measure of performance. You are cautioned not to place undue reliance on Adjusted 
EBITDA. 

36 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Below is a reconciliation of our net loss to this non-GAAP measure: 

(in thousands)

Successor

Predecessor

Net loss

Consolidated interest expense

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

Depreciation expenses
Amortization expenses (including capitalized permission 
settlements)

Non-cash charges - stock compensation

Non-cash charges - gain (loss) on foreign currency and interest hedge

Non-cash charges - asset impairment charges

Purchase accounting adjustments (a)
Fees, expenses or charges for equity offerings, debt or 
acquisitions

Non-recurring debt restructuring  (b)

Non-recurring restructuring  (c)

Severance, separation costs and facility closures (d)

Reorganziation items, net  (e) 

ADJUSTED EBITDA

Year Ended, 
December 31, 
2012

Year Ended, 
December 31, 
2011

For the Period 
March 10, 2010 to 
December 31,
2010

For the Period 
January 1, 2010 
to March 9,
2010

$                      

(87,139)
123,197
(5,943)
58,131

$                

(2,182,370)
244,582
(100,153)
58,392

$                 

(507,727)
258,174
11,929
48,649

$            

(311,776)
157,947
(220)
10,900

370,291
4,227
(1,688)
8,003
(16,511)

474,825
8,558
811
1,674,164
22,732

475,099
4,274
(90,250)
103,933
113,182

88,265
925
7,361
4,028
-

267
-
6,716
9,375
(149,114)
319,812

$                     

3,839
-
-
32,818
-
238,198

$                     

1,513
30,000
-
23,975
-
472,751

$                  

-
9,564
-
992
-
(32,014)

$               

(a) Represents certain non-cash accounting adjustments, most significantly relating to deferred revenue, and inventory costs , that we were 
required to record as a direct result of the March 9, 2010 Restructuring and the acquisitions for the years ended 2012, 2011 and 2010. 

(b) Represents fees paid and charged to operations relating to the March 9, 2010 Restructuring. 
(c) Represents non-recurring restructuring costs (other than severance and real estate) such as consulting and realignment. 
(d) Represents costs associated with the restructuring. Included in such costs are severance, facility integration and vacancy of excess 

facilities. 2010 costs also includes program integration and related inventory obsolescence and consulting costs. 

(e) Represents net gain associated with the Chapter 11 Reorganization.  

37 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                       
                       
                     
                
                          
                      
                       
                       
                          
                          
                       
                   
                       
                       
                     
                   
                            
                            
                         
                         
                          
                                
                     
                     
                            
                    
                     
                     
                        
                          
                     
                         
                                
                            
                         
                         
                                
                                
                       
                     
                            
                                
                              
                         
                            
                          
                       
                         
                      
                                
                              
                         
Unlevered Free Cash Flow  

Free cash flow is a measure generally used by investors, analysts and management to gauge a 
company’s ability to generate cash from operations in excess of that necessary to be reinvested to 
sustain and grow the business and fund its obligations.  We calculate unlevered free cash flow as net 
cash provided by operating activities excluding cash paid for interest and reorganization items, reduced 
for cash expenditures relating to additions to pre-publication costs and additions to property, plant and 
equipment.  We believe that our unlevered free cash flow calculation provides a relevant measure of 
liquidity and a useful basis for assessing our ability to fund operations.  Unlevered free cash flow is not a 
financial measure under GAAP and should be used in conjunction with GAAP cash measures provided in 
our Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows. 

Below is a reconciliation of our net cash provided by operating activities to this non-GAAP measure: 

2012

Year Ended December 31,
2011

2010

Net cash provided by operating activities
Add back:
     Cash paid for interest
     Reorganization items included in operating activities
Less: Additions to pre-publication costs
Less: Additions to property, plant and equipment

Unlevered Free Cash Flow

$            

104,802

$               

132,796

$               

141,670

92,481
16,705
(114,522)
(50,943)
48,523

$              

180,647
-
(122,592)
(71,817)
119,034

$                

273,772
-
(118,670)
(67,698)
229,074

$                

38 

 
 
 
 
               
                 
                 
               
                        
                        
            
                
                
              
                  
                  
  
Business Operating Results 

We are organized along two business segments: Education and Trade Publishing.  The Education 
business is the largest division, and represented approximately 88% and 90% of our total net sales for the 
years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.  Our Trade Publishing represented 
approximately 12% and 10% our total net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, 
respectively.  The Corporate/Other category represents non-allocated corporate expenses.  The majority 
of our non-GAAP reconciling items for Adjusted EBITDA reflected herein impact the Education business 
and Corporate/Other category.   We changed our corporate cost allocation policy in the fourth quarter of 
2012; thus the 2011 amounts have been adjusted to conform with the 2012 presentation. 

Results of Operations – Comparing Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 

Year Ended                               

Percentage
Change

2012

2011

Net sales:

Education

Trade Publishing

Corporate/Other

Total

$    

1,128,591
157,050
-

$    

1,169,645
125,650
-

$    

1,285,641

$    

1,295,295

Adjusted EBITDA:

Education

Trade Publishing

Corporate/Other

Total

Net Sales 

$        

$        

329,723
28,774
(38,685)
319,812

278,930
12,888
(53,620)
238,198

$        

$        

-3.5%
25.0%
-

18.2%
123.3%
-27.9%

Education 
The Education business net sales for the year ended December 31, 2012, decreased $41.1 million, or 
3.5% from $1,169.6 million for the same period in 2011 to $1,128.6 million.  The decrease was primarily 
due to a $47.0 million decline in domestic education sales from the prior year.  This is a result of our 
addressable new adoption and open territory sales being down from the prior year largely due to known 
lower adoptions in 2012 coupled with a continuing decline in the open territory market.  The addressable 
adoption market is down approximately 23% when compared to the prior year and the open territory 
market is down approximately 8% from the prior year.  While our Singapore Math product continues to 
outperform, certain other supplemental product sales are down due to aging products.  The decrease was 
partially offset by the strength of our professional development and reading intervention sales which 
increased $20.5 million. 

Trade Publishing 
Net sales for the Trade Publishing business for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased $31.4 
million, or 25.0% to $157.1 million from $125.7 million for the same period in 2011.  The increase is 
primarily attributed to the theatrical releases of “The Hobbit”, “Life of Pi” and “Extremely Loud and 
Incredibly Close” which drove increased book sales.  Further, there was a continued increase in e-Book 
sales driven by an overall growth in digital devices.  

39 

 
 
 
 
 
          
          
                   
                   
            
            
            
           
           
 
 
 
   
 
 
Adjusted EBITDA 

Education 
Our Education business Adjusted EBITDA for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased $50.8 
million, or 18.2%, from $278.9 million for the same period in 2011 to $329.7 million.  The increase was 
attributed to a reduction in labor related costs due to the head count reduction associated with the 
restructuring activity and a reduction in travel expense and other fixed and discretionary costs realized as 
part of cost control measures.  The increase was offset by the effect of the $41.1 million decrease in net 
sales for the year.   

Trade Publishing  
Adjusted EBITDA for the Trade Publishing business for the year ended December 31, 2012 increased 
$15.9 million, or 123.3%, to $28.8 million from $12.9 million for the same period in 2011. The increase 
was primarily attributed to the effect of the $31.4 million increase in net sales offset by slightly higher 
royalties. 

Corporate/Other  
Corporate/Other represents certain general overhead costs not fully allocated to the business units such 
as Legal, Accounting, Treasury, Human Resources and C-suite functions.  Additionally, 2011 included 
headcount associated with certain incubator initiatives which were terminated in the latter half of 2011 
resulting in labor savings in 2012.  Adjusted EBITDA for Corporate/Other for the year ended December 
31, 2012 increased $14.9 million, to a loss of $38.7 million from a loss of $53.6 million for the same period 
in 2011.  The increase was due to lower headcount and administrative expenses associated with cost 
control measures.  

Results of Operations – Comparing Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 

Year Ended                               

Percentage
Change

2011

2010

Net sales:

Education

Trade Publishing

Corporate/Other

Total

$    

1,169,645
125,650
-

$    

1,383,147
123,900
-

$    

1,295,295

$    

1,507,047

Adjusted EBITDA:

Education

Trade Publishing

Corporate/Other

Total

Net Sales 

$        

$        

278,930
12,888
(53,619)
238,199

490,262
12,730
(62,255)
440,737

$        

$        

-15.4%
1.4%
-

-43.1%
1.2%
-13.9%

Education 
The Education business net sales for the year ended December 31, 2011, decreased $213.5 million, or 
15.4%, from $1,383.1 million for the same period in 2010 to $1,169.6 million.  The decline was largely 
driven by a reduction in the Texas adoption market by over $250 million from 2010 coupled with a decline 
in sales to open territories along with a decline in international sales.  Net sales for Texas for the year 
ended December 31, 2011 was $72.0 million, approximately $119.0 million less than the same period in 
2010.  Additionally, sales to open territories were approximately $61.0 million lower for the year ended 
2011 compared to the same period in 2010 due primarily to the contraction of spending throughout most 

40 

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
          
          
                   
                   
            
            
            
           
           
 
 
states.  Lastly, our international sales were $33.0 million lower in 2011 than 2010 due to a tightening of 
credit terms with our middle east distribution partners.    

Trade Publishing 
Net sales for the Trade Publishing business for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased $1.8 
million, or 1.4%, to $125.7 million from $123.9 million for the same period in 2010.  The increase was 
primarily attributed to favorable returns compared to the prior year due to a shift to e-book sales from print 
sales partially offset by a decline in sub-rights income. 

Adjusted EBITDA 

Education 
Our Education business Adjusted EBITDA for the year ended December 31, 2011 decreased $211.3 
million, or 43.1%, from $490.3 million for the same period in 2010 to $278.9 million.  The decline was 
largely driven by the 2011 decline in net sales attributed to the smaller markets in Texas and open 
territories.  Additionally, our cost of sales rate increased as we shifted to more development and 
consulting services from the more profitable print products.  Additionally, we incurred higher bad debt 
expense and returns expense attributed to a tightening of credit terms with middle east distribution 
partners.   

Trade Publishing 
Adjusted EBITDA for the Trade Publishing business for the year ended December 31, 2011 increased 
$0.2 million, or 1.2%, to $12.9 million from $12.7 million for the same period in 2010. The increase was 
primarily attributed to cost management. 

Corporate/Other  
Corporate/Other represents certain general overhead costs not fully allocated to the business units along 
with incubator initiatives focusing on consumer and emerging markets and research and development.  
Adjusted EBITDA for Corporate/Other for the year ended December 31, 2011 decreased $8.6 million, to a 
loss of $53.6 million from a loss of $62.2 million for the same period in 2010.  The increase was due to 
the elimination of our corporate office in Dublin. 

Liquidity and Capital Resources 

(in thousands)

Cash and cash equivalents
Short-term investments
Current portion of long-term debt
Long-term debt
Operating cash flow
Unlevered free cash flow

Year Ended December 31,
2011

2010

2012

$       

329,078
146,041
2,500
245,625
104,802
48,523

$       

413,610
-
43,500
2,968,088
132,796
119,034

$       

380,073
17,667
193,064
2,668,530
141,670
229,074

As discussed in Note 2 to the Financial Statements, on June 22, 2012, our creditors converted the First 
Lien Credit Agreement consisting of the Term Loan with an aggregate outstanding principal balance of 
$2.6 billion and the Revolving Loan with an aggregate outstanding principal balance of $235.8 million, 
and the outstanding $300.0 million principal amount of 10.5% Senior Notes to 100 percent pro rata 
ownership of the Company’s common stock. 

41 

  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
          
        
        
 
 
 
On May 22, 2012, we entered into a new $500.0 million senior secured credit facility (DIP facility) which 
was converted into an exit facility on the effective date of the emergence from Chapter 11.  This exit 
facility consists of a $250.0 million revolving credit facility, which is secured by the Company’s accounts 
receivable and inventory, and a $250.0 million term loan credit facility.  The proceeds of the exit facility 
were used to fund the costs of the reorganization and provide post-closing working capital to the 
Company.  As of December 31, 2012, we had approximately $248.1 million outstanding under our term 
loan credit facility and no amounts outstanding under our revolving credit facility.  We had approximately 
$185.9 million of borrowing availability under our revolving credit facility and approximately $26.2 million 
of outstanding letters of credit as of December 31, 2012.  We had approximately $329.1 million of cash 
and cash equivalents and $146.0 million of short-term investments at December 31, 2012.     

We expect our cash flows from operations combined with our cash on hand and borrowings under our 
revolving credit facility to provide sufficient liquidity to fund our current obligations, capital spending, debt 
service requirements and working capital requirements over at least the next twelve months. 

Operating activities 
Net cash provided by operating activities was $104.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, a 
$28.0 million decrease from the $132.8 million provided by operating activities for the year ended 
December 31, 2011.  The decrease in cash provided by operating activities from 2011 to 2012 was 
primarily due to decreases in working capital, primarily consisting of lower deferred revenue and a 
decrease in accounts payable partially offset by stronger operating performance. 

Net cash provided by operating activities was $132.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, a 
$8.9 million decrease from the $141.7 million provided by operating activities for the year ended 
December 31, 2010.  The decrease in cash provided by operating activities from 2010 to 2011 was driven 
by an unfavorable change in receivables as a substantial amount of prior year adoption sales were 
collected by the end of the fourth quarter of 2010, along with lower inventory levels and decreased 
interest payable.  These changes were partially offset by favorable changes in accounts payable and 
severance and other charges. 

Investing activities 
Net cash used in investing activities was $296.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, a 
increase of $100.7 million from the $195.3 million used in investing activities for the year ended 
December 31, 2011.  The increase in cash expenditures for 2012 is primarily attributable to purchases of 
$165.6 million of short-term investments offset by reductions in capital expenditures of $28.9 million for 
property, plant, and equipment and pre-publication costs, and reductions in cash outlays over the prior 
year for acquisitions of $24.6 million.   

Net cash used in investing activities was $195.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, a 
decrease of $62.4 million from the $257.7 million used in investing activities for the year ended December 
31, 2010.  The decrease reflects $17.8 million in proceeds from the sale of short term investments and 
$16.8 million in proceeds from restricted cash accounts related to cash collateralized letter of credit which 
were released in 2011.  In the year ended December 31, 2010, $18.0 million had been used for the 
purchase of short term investments and $42.7 million had been deposited to restricted cash accounts.  
Partially offsetting the source of cash from investing activities was $30.0 million of additional capital 
expenditure over the prior period for an acquisition of an intangible asset.   

Financing activities 
Net cash provided by financing activities was $106.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, 
which was $10.7 million higher than the net cash provided by financing activities for the year ended 
December 31, 2011.  During 2012, in connection with our emergence from bankruptcy, we issued new 
term debt with proceeds of $250.0 million and we paid $104.0 million in restructuring costs and $26.6 
million in deferred financing fees relating to the bankruptcy and new term debt.  We also paid $10.9 

42 

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
million of principal payments on the debt existing prior to bankruptcy and three quarters of principal 
payments related to the new term debt totaling $1.9 million.  During 2011, we issued secured notes with 
proceeds of $300.0 million and we paid $150.0 million to retire the 7.2% secured notes that matured on 
March 15, 2011.  We also made principal payments on our long term debt totaling $43.5 million and paid 
approximately $10.5 million of fees in connection with the issuance of the $300.0 million 10.5% Senior 
Notes.   

Net cash provided by financing activities was $96.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, which 
was $306.1 million lower than the net cash provided by financing activities for the year ended December 
31, 2010.  During 2011, we received $300.0 million through a 10.5% Senior Notes offering and paid $8.8 
million for fees associated with that offering.  We also paid $1.6 million of deferred financing fees related 
to the amendments to our accounts receivable securitization facility.  We paid $150.0 million to retire the 
7.2% secured notes that matured on March 15, 2011.  During the year ended December 31, 2010, we 
raised $649.6 million, net of fees, from our rights offering.  Offsetting this inflow was a payment of $43.7 
million of related restructuring costs.   

Unlevered Free Cash Flow 
Unlevered Free Cash Flow was $48.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, which was $70.5 
million lower than the $119.0 million unlevered free cash flow for the year ended December 31, 2011.  
The decrease was primarily due to a negative impact of changes in our operating assets and liabilities 
partially offset by decreases in capital expenditures and stronger operating results. 

Unlevered Free Cash Flow was $119.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, which was $110.1 
million lower than the $229.1 million unlevered free cash flow for the year ended December 31, 2010.  
The decrease was primarily due to lower operating results and a negative impact of changes in our 
operating assets and liabilities. 

Critical Accounting Policies 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires the use of estimates, 
assumptions and judgments by management that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, net 
sales, expenses and related disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities in the amounts reported in the 
financial statements and accompanying notes.  On an on-going basis, we evaluate our estimates and 
assumptions, including, but not limited to, book returns, allowance for bad debts, recoverability of 
advances to authors, valuation of inventory, financial instruments, depreciation and amortization periods, 
recoverability of long-term assets such as property, plant and equipment, capitalized pre-publication 
costs, other identified intangibles, goodwill, deferred revenue, income taxes, pensions and other 
postretirement benefits, contingencies, litigation and purchase accounting. We base our estimates on 
historical experience and on various other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable under the 
circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying value of 
assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources.  Actual results may differ from those 
estimates.  For more information regarding our critical accounting policies, see Note 3 to our Financial 
Statements.   

Revenue Recognition 
We derive revenue primarily from the sale of print and digital textbooks and instructional materials, trade 
books, reference materials, multimedia instructional programs, license fees for book rights, content, 
software and services that include test development, test scoring, consulting and training. Revenue from 
print and digital textbooks and instructional materials, trade books, reference materials, assessment 
materials and multimedia instructional programs is recognized in the period when persuasive evidence of 
an arrangement with the customer exists, the products are shipped, title and risk of loss have transferred 
to the customer, all significant obligations have been performed and collection is reasonably assured.   

43 

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
We enter into certain contractual arrangements that have multiple elements, one or more of which may be 
delivered subsequent to the initial sale.  These multiple deliverable arrangements may include print and 
digital media, professional development, training services, software, software as a service (SaaS), and 
various services related to the software including but not limited to hosting, maintenance and support, and 
implementation.  At the inception of these arrangements, consideration is allocated using the Relative 
Sales Value (RSV) method.  For each element, we determine whether the element falls under the 
accounting guidance within multiple element arrangements or software revenue recognition.  For 
elements which fall under the accounting guidance for multiple element arrangements, we apply the 
highest applicable relative selling price guidance available, Vendor Specific Objective Evidence (VSOE), 
Third Party Evidence (TPE), or Best Estimate of Selling Price (BESP).  For elements which fall under the 
accounting guidance for software revenue recognition, we apply VSOE and the residual method.  If we 
are not able to establish VSOE, we estimate relative selling price based on TPE or BESP for purposes of 
allocation of total project discount, and defer until all such elements are fulfilled assuming all other 
revenue recognition criteria have been met.  For multiple deliverable arrangements, fair value is 
determined for all elements and the relative sales value of revenue for items to be delivered after the 
initial sale is deferred until such time as the items are delivered.   A significant component of revenue that 
is deferred relates to gratis items delivered in connection with sales to customers within adoption states.  
As our business model shifts to more digital and on-line learning components, additional revenue could 
be deferred.  As products are shipped with right of return, a provision for estimated returns on these sales 
is made at the time of sale based on historical experience.  

License fees for software products without future obligations are recognized upon delivery.  Certain 
contracts include software and on-going fees for maintenance and other support.  If VSOE of the fair 
value of each element of the arrangement exists, the elements of the contract are unbundled and the 
revenue is recognized for each element when or as delivered. Revenue for test delivery, test scoring and 
training are recognized when the services have been completed, the fee is fixed or determinable and 
collection is reasonably assured.  Revenue for test development is recognized as the services are 
provided.  Differences between what has been billed and what has been recognized as revenue is 
recorded as deferred revenue.  We enter into agreements to license certain book publishing rights and 
content.  We recognize revenue on such arrangements when all materials have been delivered to the 
customer and collection is reasonably assured. 

Accounts Receivable 
Accounts receivable are recorded net of allowances for doubtful accounts and reserves for book returns.  
In the normal course of business, we extend credit to customers that satisfy predefined criteria.  We 
estimate the collectability of our receivables.  Allowances for doubtful accounts are established through 
the evaluation of accounts receivable aging and prior collection experience to estimate the ultimate 
collectability of these receivables.  Reserves for book returns are based on historical return rates and 
sales patterns. 

Inventories 
Inventories are stated at the lower of weighted average cost or net realizable value.  The level of obsolete 
and excess inventory is estimated on a program or title level-basis by comparing the number of units in 
stock with the expected future demand.  The expected future demand of a program or title is determined 
by the copyright year, the previous years’ sales history, the subsequent year’s sales forecast, known 
forward-looking trends including our development cycle to replace the title or program and competing 
titles or programs. 

Pre-publication costs 
We capitalize the art, prepress, manuscript and other costs incurred in the creation of the master copy of 
a book or other media (the “pre-publication costs”).  Pre-publication costs are primarily amortized from the 
year of copyright, or sale if earlier, over five years using the sum-of-the-years-digits method.  This policy 
is used throughout the Company, except for the Trade Publishing consumer books, which expenses such 

44 

  
 
 
 
 
 
costs as incurred, and the assessment products, which uses the straight-line amortization method.  The 
amortization methods and periods chosen best reflect the pattern of expected sales generated from 
individual titles or programs.  We periodically evaluate the remaining lives and recoverability of capitalized 
pre-publication costs, which are often dependent upon program acceptance by state adoption authorities. 

Amortization expense related to pre-publication costs for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 
were $137.7 million and $176.8 million, respectively.  For the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 
amortization expense related to pre-publication costs was $37.9 million and for the period March 10, 2010 
to December 31, 2010 amortization expense related to pre-publication costs was $181.5 million 
Pre-publication costs recorded on the balance sheet are periodically reviewed for impairment by 
comparing the unamortized capitalized costs of the assets to the fair value of those assets.   

For the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010, and the 
period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010, pre-publication costs of $0.4 million, $33.5 million, zero 
and $16.9 million, respectively, were deemed to be impaired.  The impairment was included as a charge 
to the statement of operations in the impairment charge for goodwill, intangible assets, pre-publication 
costs and fixed assets caption.  

Goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets 
Goodwill is the excess of the purchase price paid over the fair value of the net assets of the business 
acquired.  Other intangible assets principally consist of branded trademarks and trade names, acquired 
publishing rights and customer relationships.  Goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets (certain trade 
names) are not amortized but are reviewed at least annually for impairment or earlier, if an indication of 
impairment exists.  Recoverability of goodwill and indefinite lived intangibles is evaluated using a two-step 
process.  In the first step, the fair value of a reporting unit is compared to its carrying value.  If the fair 
value of a reporting unit exceeds the carrying value of the net assets assigned to a reporting unit, goodwill 
is considered not impaired and no further testing is required.  If the carrying value of the net assets 
assigned to a reporting unit exceeds the fair value of a reporting unit, the second step of the impairment 
test is performed in order to determine the implied fair value of a reporting unit’s goodwill.  Determining 
the implied fair value of goodwill requires valuation of a reporting unit’s tangible and intangible assets and 
liabilities in a manner similar to the allocation of purchase price in a business combination.  If the carrying 
value of a reporting unit’s goodwill exceeds its implied fair value, goodwill is deemed impaired and is 
written down to the extent of the difference.  We estimate total fair value of each reporting unit using 
discounted cash flow analysis, and make assumptions regarding future revenue, gross margins, working 
capital levels, investments in new products, capital spending, tax, cash flows and the terminal value of the 
reporting unit.  With regard to other intangibles with indefinite lives, we determine the fair value by asset, 
which is then compared to its carrying value to determine if the assets are impaired.  

Goodwill is allocated entirely to our Education reporting unit.  Determining the fair value of a reporting unit 
is judgmental in nature, and involves the use of significant estimates and assumptions.  These estimates 
and assumptions may include revenue growth rates and operating margins used to calculate projected 
future cash flows, risk-adjusted discount rates, future economic and market conditions, the determination 
of appropriate market comparables as well as the fair value of individual assets and liabilities.  Consistent 
with prior years, we used an income approach to establish the fair value of the reporting unit as of 
October 1, 2012.  As in prior years, we used the most recent five year strategic plan as the initial basis of 
our analysis.   

We completed our annual goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible asset impairment tests as of October 1, 
2012, 2011, and 2010 and recorded a noncash impairment charge of $5.0 million for the year ended 
December 31, 2012, $1,635.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 and $87.0 million for the 
period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010. There was no impairment for the period January 1, 2010 to 
March 9, 2010. The impairments principally related to one specific tradename within the Education 

45 

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
segment in 2012, goodwill and tradenames within the Education segment in 2011, and related to 
tradenames within the Education segment and Trade Publishing segment in 2010.  The impairment 
charges resulted primarily from a decline in revenue from previously projected amounts as a result of the 
economic downturn and reduced educational spending by states and school districts.  All impairment 
charges are included in operating income.  

Publishing Rights 
A publishing right is an acquired right which allows us to publish and republish existing and future works 
as well as create new works based on previously published materials.  We determine the fair market 
value of the publishing rights arising from business combinations by discounting the after-tax cash flows 
projected to be derived from the publishing rights and titles to their net present value using a rate of return 
that accounts for the time value of money and the appropriate degree of risk.  The useful life of the 
publishing rights is based on the lives of the various copyrights involved.  We calculate amortization using 
the percentage of the projected operating income before taxes derived from the titles in the current year 
as a percentage of the total estimated operating income before taxes over the remaining useful life.  
Acquired publication rights, as well as customer-related intangibles with definitive lives, are primarily 
amortized on an accelerated basis over periods ranging from three to 20 years. 

Royalty advances 
Royalty advances to authors are capitalized and represent amounts paid in advance of the sale of an 
author’s product and are recovered as earned.  As advances are recorded, a partial reserve may be 
recorded immediately based primarily upon historical sales experience.  Advances are evaluated 
periodically to determine if they are expected to be recovered.  Any portion of a royalty advance that is 
not expected to be recovered is fully reserved. 

Impact of inflation and changing prices 

Although inflation is currently well below levels in prior years and has, therefore, benefited recent results, 
particularly in the area of manufacturing costs, there are offsetting costs. Our ability to adjust selling 
prices has always been limited by competitive factors and long-term contractual arrangements which 
either prohibit price increases or limit the amount by which prices may be increased. Further, a weak 
domestic economy at a time of low inflation could cause lower tax receipts at the state and local level, 
and the funding and buying patterns for textbooks and other educational materials could be adversely 
affected.  Prices for paper moderated during the last three years 

The most significant investments affected by inflation include pre-publication, other property, plant and 
equipment and inventories. We use the weighted average cost method to value substantially all inventory. 
We have negotiated favorable pricing through contractual agreements with our two top print and sourcing 
vendors, and from our other major vendors, which has helped to stabilize our unit costs, and therefore our 
cost of inventories sold.  Our publishing business requires a high level of investment in pre-publication for 
our educational and reference works, and in other property, plant and equipment. We expect to continue 
to commit funds to the publishing areas through both internal growth and acquisitions.  We believe that by 
continuing to emphasize cost controls, technological improvements and quality control, we can continue 
to moderate the impact of inflation on our operating results and financial position. 

Covenant Compliance 

As of December 31, 2012, we were in compliance with all of our debt covenants. 

We are currently required to meet certain restrictive financial covenants as defined under our Term Loan 
and Revolving Credit Facility.  We have financial covenants primarily pertaining to interest coverage and 
maximum leverage ratios.  A breach of any of these covenants, ratios, tests or restrictions, as applicable, 
for which a waiver is not obtained could result in an event of default, in which case our lenders could elect 

46 

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
to declare all amounts outstanding to be immediately due and payable and result in a cross-default under 
other arrangements containing such provisions.  A default would permit lenders to accelerate the maturity 
for the debt under these agreements and to foreclose upon any collateral securing the debt owed to these 
lenders and to terminate any commitments of these lenders to lend to us.  If the lenders accelerate the 
payment of the indebtedness, our assets may not be sufficient to repay in full the indebtedness and any 
other indebtedness that would become due as a result of any acceleration.  Further, in such an event, the 
lenders would not be required to make further loans to us, and assuming similar facilities were not 
established and we are unable to obtain replacement financing, it would materially affect our liquidity and 
results of operations.   

Contractual Obligations 

The following table provides information with respect to our estimated commitments and obligations as of 
December 31, 2012: 

(in thousands) 

Contractual Obligations

Total

Less than 1 
year

1-3 years

3-5 years

More than 5 
years

Term loan due May 2018 (1)

$        248,125 

$         2,500 

(dollars)
$         5,000 

$           5,000 

$        235,625 

Capital Leases

Operating leases (2)

Purchase obligations (3)

           5,925 

        1,689 

        4,236 

               -   

                -   

       192,930 

      43,818 

       82,642 

        48,388 

         18,082 

       407,535 

    187,628 

     210,329 

          9,513 

               65 

Total cash contractual obligations

$

854,515

$

235,635

$

302,207

$

62,901

$

253,772

(1)

The Term loan due May 2018 amortizes at a rate of 1% per annum of the original $250.0 million amount. Amounts in the table above 
exclude interest payable on the Term loan.

(2)

Represents minimum lease payments under non-cancelable operating leases. 

(3)

Purchase obligations are agreements to purchase goods or services that are enforceable and legally binding. These goods and services 
consist primarily of author advances, subcontractor expenses, information technology licenses, and outsourcing arrangements. 

In addition to the payments described above, we have employee benefit obligations that require future 
payments.  For example, we have made $19.8 million in cash contributions to our pension and 
postretirement benefit plans in 2012 and expect to make another $13.5 million of contributions in 2013 
relating to our pension and postretirement benefit plans although we are not obligated to do so.  We 
expect to periodically draw and repay borrowings under the accounts receivable securitization facility.  
We believe that we will be able to meet our cash interest obligations on our outstanding debt when they 
are due and payable. 

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangement 

We have no off-balance sheet arrangements. 

47 

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK 

We are exposed to market risk from foreign currency exchange rates and interest rates, which could 
affect operating results, financial position and cash flows.  We manage exposure to these market risks 
through our regular operating and financing activities and, when appropriate, through the use of derivative 
financial instruments.  These derivative financial instruments are utilized to hedge economic exposures as 
well as reduce our earnings and cash flow volatility resulting from shifts in market rates.  As permitted, we 
may designate certain of these derivative contracts for hedge accounting treatment in accordance with 
authoritative guidance regarding accounting for derivative instruments and hedging activities.  However, 
certain of these instruments may not qualify for, or we may choose not to elect, hedge accounting 
treatment and, accordingly, the results of our operations may be exposed to some level of volatility.  
Volatility in our results of operations will vary with the type and amount of derivative hedges outstanding, 
as well as fluctuations in the currency and interest rate market during the period. Periodically we may 
enter into derivative contracts, including interest rate swap agreements and interest rate caps and collars 
to manage interest rate exposures, and foreign currency spot, forward, swap and option contracts to 
manage foreign currency exposures.  The fair market values of all these derivative contracts change with 
fluctuations in interest rates and/or currency rates and are designed so that any changes in their values 
are offset by changes in the values of the underlying exposures.  Derivative financial instruments are held 
solely as risk management tools and not for trading or speculative purposes. 

By their nature, all derivative instruments involve, to varying degrees, elements of market and credit risk 
not recognized in our financial statements.  The market risk associated with these instruments resulting 
from currency exchange and interest rate movements is expected to offset the market risk of the 
underlying transactions, assets and liabilities being hedged.  Our policy is to deal with counterparties 
having a single A or better credit rating at the time of the execution.  We manage credit risk through the 
continuous monitoring of exposures to such counterparties. 

We continue to review liquidity sufficiency by performing various stress test scenarios, such as cash flow 
forecasting which considers hypothetical interest rate movements.  Furthermore, we continue to closely 
monitor current events and the financial institutions that support our credit facility, including monitoring 
their credit ratings and outlooks, credit default swap levels, capital raising and merger activity. 

We have $248.1 million of aggregate principal amount indebtedness outstanding under our Term Loan 
that bears interest at a variable rate.  An increase or decrease of 1% in the interest rate will change our 
interest expense by approximately $2.5 million on an annual basis.  We also have up to $250.0 million of 
borrowing availability, subject to borrowing base availability, under our Revolving Credit Facility, and 
borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facility bear interest at a variable rate.  We have no borrowings 
outstanding under the Revolving Credit Facility at December 31, 2012.  Assuming that the Revolving 
Credit Facility is fully drawn, an increase or decrease of 1% in the interest rate will change our interest 
expense associated with the Revolving Credit Facility by $2.5 million on an annual basis. 

We conduct various digital development activities in Ireland, and as such, our cash flows and costs are 
subject to fluctuations from changes in foreign currency exchange rates.  We manage our exposures to 
this market risk through the use of short-term forward exchange contracts, when deemed appropriate, 
which were not significant as of December 31, 2012.  We do not enter into derivative transactions or use 
other financial instruments for trading or speculative purposes. 

48 

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. 
Financial Statements 
Table of Contents 

  Page(s) 

Reports of Independent Auditors………………………………………………………….…………………..50-51 

Consolidated Balance Sheets .................................................................................................................... 52 

Consolidated Statements of Operations .................................................................................................... 53 

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss) ..................................................................... 54 

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows ................................................................................................... 55 

Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity (Deficit) ........................................................................ 56 

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements ...................................................................................... 57-104 

49 

 
 
 
      
 
Independent Auditor’s Report 

To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. 

We have audited the accompanying consolidated financial statements of HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. and its subsidiaries 
(Successor), which comprise the consolidated balance sheets as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, and the related 
consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), stockholders’ equity (deficit), and cash flows for the 
years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 and for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010 (Successor Periods).   

Management's Responsibility for the Consolidated Financial Statements 

Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of the consolidated financial statements in accordance 
with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America; this includes the design, implementation, and 
maintenance of internal control relevant to the preparation and fair presentation of consolidated financial statements that are 
free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 

Auditor's Responsibility 

Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the consolidated financial statements based on our audits.  We conducted our 
audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America.  Those standards require 
that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are 
free from material misstatement.   

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated 
financial statements.  The procedures selected depend on our judgment, including the assessment of the risks of material 
misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to fraud or error.  In making those risk assessments, we 
consider internal control relevant to the Company's preparation and fair presentation of the consolidated financial statements 
in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an 
opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control.  Accordingly, we express no such opinion.  An audit also 
includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of significant accounting 
estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements.  
We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion. 

Opinion 

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial 
position of HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011, and the 
results of their operations and their cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 and for the period March 
10, 2010 to December 31, 2010 in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of 
America.   

Other Matter 

Our audit was conducted for the purpose of forming an opinion on the financial statements taken as a whole.  The Schedule 
II Valuation and Qualifying Accounts for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 and for the period March 10, 2010 to 
December 31, 2010 (Successor Periods) is presented for purposes of additional analysis and is not a required part of the 
financial statements.  The information is the responsibility of management and was derived from and relates directly to the 
underlying accounting and other records used to prepare the financial statements.  The information has been subjected to 
the auditing procedures applied in the audit of the financial statements and certain additional procedures, including 
comparing and reconciling such information directly to the underlying accounting and other records used to prepare the 
financial statements or to the financial statements themselves and other additional procedures, in accordance with auditing 
standards generally accepted in the United States of America.  In our opinion, the information is fairly stated, in all material 
respects, in relation to the financial statements taken as a whole. 

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Boston, Massachusetts 
March 29, 2013 

50 

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report of Independent Auditors 

To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. 

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), stockholders’ 
equity (deficit), and cash flows for the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 present fairly, in all material respects, 
the results of operations and cash flows of HMH Publishing Company and its subsidiaries (Predecessor) for the 
period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United 
States of America.  These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management.  Our 
responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audit.  We conducted our audit of 
these statements in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America.  Those 
standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial 
statements are free of material misstatement.  An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the 
amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant 
estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.  We believe that our 
audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion. 

Our audit was conducted for the purpose of forming an opinion on the basic financial statements taken as a whole.  
The Schedule II Valuation and Qualifying Accounts for the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 is presented for 
purposes of additional analysis and is not a required part of the financial statements.  Such information has been 
subjected to the auditing procedures applied in the audit of the basic financial statements and, in our opinion, is fairly 
stated in all material respects in relation to the basic financial statements taken as a whole. 

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Boston, Massachusetts 
March 30, 2011 

51 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Consolidated Balance Sheets 
December 31, 2012      

(in thousands of dollars, except share information)

Assets
Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents
Restricted cash
Short-term investments
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for bad debts and book  
 returns of $36.4 million and $43.8 million, respectively
Inventories
Deferred income taxes
Prepaid expenses and other assets

Total current assets

Property, plant, and equipment, net
Pre-publication costs, net
Royalty advances to authors, net of allowance of $20.5 million and 
 $12.3 million, respectively
Goodwill
Other intangible assets, net
Other assets 

Total assets

Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity (Deficit)
Current liabilities

Current portion of long-term debt
Accounts payable
Royalties payable
Salaries, wages, and commissions payable
Deferred revenue
Interest payable
Severance and other charges
Accrued postretirement benefits
Other liabilities

Total current liabilities

Long-term debt
Royalties payable
Long-term deferred revenue
Accrued pension benefits
Accrued postretirement benefits
Deferred income taxes
Other liabilities

Total liabilities

Commitments and contingencies (Note 14)

Stockholders' equity (deficit)

Preferred stock, $0.01 par value: 10,000,000 shares authorized; no shares
 issued and outstanding at December 31, 2012 
Common stock, $0.01 par value: 190,000,000 shares authorized;
69,958,989 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2012
and $0.001 par value:  600,000,000 shares authorized; 283,636,235
shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2011
Treasury stock, 41,011 shares as of December 31, 2012
Capital in excess of par value
Accumulated deficit
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)
Total stockholders' equity (deficit)
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity (deficit)

December 31,
2012

December 31,
2011

$              

329,078
-
146,041

$          

413,610
26,495
-

229,118
197,613
42,858
13,731
958,439

149,227
256,202

256,271
242,162
14,152
13,811
966,501

152,212
289,125

48,247
520,088
1,067,052
30,329
3,029,584

$           

42,700
520,088
1,274,213
19,064
3,263,903

$       

$                   

2,500
86,416
60,352
34,730
124,216
87
18,290
2,342
30,421
359,354

245,625
2,070
171,105
48,714
27,231
124,588
107,196
1,085,883

$             

43,500
130,128
52,294
43,515
141,763
30,843
35,750
2,252
45,612
525,657

2,968,088
1,313
208,173
64,490
33,718
32,072
104,944
3,938,455

-

-

700
-
4,741,765
(2,777,236)
(21,528)
1,943,701
3,029,584

$           

284
-
2,038,714
(2,690,097)
(23,453)
(674,552)
3,263,903

$       

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements. 

52 

 
                                                           
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Consolidated Statements of Operations 

(in thousands of dollars)

Net sales
Costs and expenses
Cost of sales, excluding pre-publication and publishing 
 rights amortization
Publishing rights amortization
Pre-publication amortization

Cost of sales

Selling and administrative
Other intangible asset amortization
Impairment charge for goodwill, intangible assets,
     pre-publication costs and fixed assets
Severance and other charges
Gain on bargain purchase
Gain on sale of assets

Operating loss

Other income (expense)
Interest expense
Other (loss) income, net
Change in fair value of derivative instruments

Loss before reorganization items and taxes

Reorganization items, net
Income tax expense (benefit)
Net loss

Successor

For the Year
Ended December
31, 2012

For the Year
Ended December
31, 2011

For the Period
March 10,
2010 to
December 31,
2010

Predecessor
For the Period
January 1,
2010 to
March 9,
2010

$             

1,285,641

$             

1,295,295

$        

1,397,142

$         

109,905

515,948
177,747
137,729
831,424
533,462
54,815

8,003
9,375
(30,751)
-
(120,687)

512,612
230,624
176,829
920,065
640,023
67,372

1,674,164
32,801
-
(2,000)
(2,037,130)

559,593
235,977
181,521
977,091
598,807
57,601

103,933
(11,243)
-
(1,179)
(327,868)

45,270
48,336
37,923
131,529
119,039
2,006

4,028
-
-
-
(146,697)

(123,197)
-
1,688
(242,196)
(149,114)
(5,943)
(87,139)

$                

(244,582)
-
(811)
(2,282,523)
-
(100,153)
(2,182,370)

$            

(258,174)
(6)
90,250
(495,798)
-
11,929
(507,727)

$          

(157,947)
9
(7,361)
(311,996)
-
(220)
(311,776)

$        

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements. 

53 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss)   

(in thousands of dollars)

Net loss

Other comprehensive income (loss), net of taxes:
     Foreign currency translation adjustments
     Change in pension and benefit plan liability, net of tax expense
         of $85 for 2012
     Unrealized gain on short-term investments

Other comprehensive income (loss), net of taxes

Successor

For the Year
Ended December
31, 2012

For the Year
Ended December
31, 2011

For the Period
March 10,
2010 to
December 31,
2010

Predecessor
For the Period
January 1,
2010 to
March 9,
2010

$                

(87,139)

$         

(2,182,370)

$               

(507,727)

$         

(311,776)

(465)
2,378

12

1,925

(4,241)
(14,509)

181

(18,569)

1,829
(6,533)

(180)

(4,884)

392
(1,313)

-

(921)

Comprehensive loss

$               

(85,214)

$        

(2,200,939)

$              

(512,611)

$        

(312,697)

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements. 

54 

 
 
                
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows 

(in thousands of dollars)

Cash flows from operating activities
Net loss
Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash 
 provided by (used in) operating activities

Noncash interest expense
Gain on bargain purchase
Gain on sale of assets
Depreciation and amortization expense
Amortization of debt discount and deferred financing costs
Deferred income taxes (benefit)
Noncash stock-based compensation expense
Noncash issuance of warrants
Reorganization items
Impairment charge for goodwill, intangible assets, pre-publication 
costs and fixed assets
Allowance for loan receivable from officer
Change in fair value of derivative instruments
Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of acquisitions

Accounts receivable
Inventories
Accounts payable and accrued expenses
Royalties, net
Deferred revenue
Interest payable
Severance and other charges
Accrued pension and postretirement benefits
Other, net

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Proceeds from (deposits into) restricted cash accounts
Proceeds from sale of short-term investments
Purchases of short-term investments
Additions to pre-publication costs
Additions to property, plant, and equipment
Proceeds from sale of assets
Acquisition of intangible asset
Acquisition of business, net of cash acquired

Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
(Payments) borrowings under receivables funding agreement
Proceeds from term loan
Payments of long-term debt
Payments of short-term debt
Proceeds from secured notes offering
Payments of deferred financing fees
Dividend to affiliate
Proceeds from issuance of common stock, net 
Loan advances to officer
Payment of capital restructuring costs

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents
Beginning of period
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
End of period
Supplementary disclosure of cash flow information
Income taxes paid (refunded) 
Interest paid
Deferred/contingent consideration for acquisitions, net (non cash)
Pre-publication costs included in accounts payable (non cash)
Property, plant, and equipment included in accounts payable (non cash)
Property, plant, and equipment acquired under capital leases (non cash)
Chapter 11 Reorganization (See Note 2)
March 2010 Restructuring (See Note 1)

Successor

For the Year
Ended
December 31,
2012

For the Year
Ended
December 31,
2011

For the Period
March 10,
2010 to
December 31,
2010

Predecessor
For the Period
January 1,
2010 to
March 9,
2010

$               

(87,139)

$          

(2,182,370)

$        

(507,727)

$        

(311,776)

-
(30,751)
-
428,422
24,584
(10,076)
6,254
10,747
(179,024)

8,003
-
(1,688)

25,826
44,549
(44,594)
9,478
(54,615)
4,912
(17,460)
(19,710)
(12,916)
104,802

26,495
19,575
(165,603)
(114,522)
(50,943)
-
-
(11,000)
(295,998)

-
250,000
(12,750)
-
-
(26,586)
-
-
-
(104,000)
106,664
(84,532)

-
-
(2,000)
532,996
46,249
(117,616)
8,559
-
-

1,674,164
-
811

(2,356)
39,825
18,488
5,778
110,993
18,013
4,570
(10,568)
(12,740)
132,796

16,751
17,800
-
(122,592)
(71,817)
150
(30,000)
(5,592)
(195,300)

-
-
(43,500)
(150,000)
300,000
(10,459)
-
-
-
-
96,041
33,537

-
-
(1,179)
523,651
37,040
11,708
4,274
-
-

103,933
18,875
(90,250)

(27,996)
98,329
(13,145)
11,653
130,683
(49,328)
(30,977)
(19,003)
(17,575)
182,966

(42,745)
-
(17,978)
(96,613)
(64,139)
2,177
-
(12,824)
(232,122)

(140,000)
-
(43,640)
-
-
-
-
649,600
(20,000)
(43,671)
402,289
353,133

20,737
-
-
99,260
13,680
(220)
925
-
-

4,028
-
7,361

86,787
(22,741)
(30,990)
(9,867)
(9,539)
118,423
(4,257)
1,297
(4,404)
(41,296)

-
-
-
(22,057)
(3,559)
-
-
-
(25,616)

2,350
-
-
-
-
-
(2,500)
-
-
-
(150)
(67,062)

413,610
(84,532)
329,078

$              

380,073
33,537
413,610

$              

26,940
353,133
380,073

$         

94,002
(67,062)
26,940

$           

$                 

7,699
92,481
-
(10,630)
1,438
4,799

$                 

2,825
180,647
4,695
-
-
-

$            

(2,210)
268,925
(15,626)
-
-
-

$               

855
4,847
-
-
-
-

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements. 

55 

 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity (Deficit) 

(in thousands of dollars, except share information)

Shares

Par Value

Com m on Stock

Treasury Stock

Predecessor Com pany
Capital
in excess
of Par
Value

Accum ulated
Deficit

Accum ulated
Other
Com prehensive 
Incom e (Loss)

Total

Balance at Decem ber 31, 2009
Net loss
Other comprehensive income (loss)
Stock compensation
Dividend to aff iliate
Recapitalization of amounts due from Parent
Balance at March 9, 2010

3,100
-
-
-
-
-
3,100

$                
-
-
-
-
-
-
$                
-

$                       
-
-
-
-
-
-
$                       
-

2,135,798
-
-
925
(2,500)
(1,154)
2,133,069

(4,734,442)
(311,776)
-
-
-
-
(5,046,218)

(16,092)
-
(921)
-
-
-
(17,013)

(2,614,736)
(311,776)
(921)
925
(2,500)
(1,154)
(2,930,162)

$    

$        

$           

$   

$    

$        

$           

$   

Successor Com pany

(in thousands of dollars, except share information)

Shares

Par Value

Treasury Stock

Com m on Stock

Capital
in excess
of Par
Value

Balance at March 10, 2010
Net loss
Other comprehensive income (loss)
Issuance of common stock, net
Stock compensation
Balance at Decem ber 31, 2010
Net loss
Other comprehensive income (loss)
Stock compensation
Balance at Decem ber 31, 2011
Net loss
Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax 

expense of $85
Issuance of common stock
Gain on debt-for-equity exchange, net of  tax

expense of $73,801

Issuance of w arrants
Stock compensation
Addition of treasury stock, 41,011 shares
Balance at Decem ber 31, 2012

129,999,970
-
-
153,636,265
-
283,636,235
-
-
-
283,636,235
-
-

$            

$    

130
-
-
154
-
284
-
-
-
284
-
-

-
$                       
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
$                       
-
-

1,376,435
-
-
649,446
4,274
2,030,155
-
-
8,559
2,038,714
-
-

$          

$   

Accum ulated
Deficit

-
$                        
(507,727)
-
-
-
(507,727)
(2,182,370)
-
-
(2,690,097)
(87,139)
-

$       

Accum ulated
Other
Com prehensive 
Incom e (Loss)

Total

-
$                      
-
(4,884)
-
-
(4,884)
-
(18,569)
-
(23,453)
-
1,925

$          

$     

1,376,565
(507,727)
(4,884)
649,600
4,274
1,517,828
(2,182,370)
(18,569)
8,559
(674,552)
(87,139)
1,925

$     

69,958,989
(283,636,235)

700
(284)

-
-

1,749,300
936,750

-
-

-
-

1,750,000
936,466

-
-
-
69,958,989

-
-
-
700

$          

-
-
-
$                       
-

10,747
6,254
-
4,741,765

$   

-
-
-
(2,777,236)

$       

-
-
-
(21,528)

$          

10,747
6,254
-
1,943,701

$   

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements. 

56 

 
    
      
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

1. 

Basis of Presentation  

HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc., ("HMH", “Houghton Mifflin Harcourt”, “we”, “us”, “our”, or the 
“Company”), is a leading global education and learning company providing innovative solutions and 
approaches to the challenges facing education today.  We are one of the world’s largest providers 
of educational products and solutions for pre-K–12 learning and we also develop and deliver 
interactive, results-driven learning solutions that advance teacher effectiveness and student 
achievement in the Education market.  Furthermore, since 1832, we have published trade and 
reference materials including award-winning adult and children’s books, fiction, and nonfiction. 

The consolidated December 31, 2012 and 2011 financial statements of HMH include the accounts 
of all of our wholly-owned subsidiaries as of and for the periods ended December 31, 2012, 
December 31, 2011, December 31, 2010 and March 9, 2010.  Prior to the March 2010 
Restructuring noted below, our operations were held by HMH Publishing Company ("HMH 
Publishing" or “Predecessor”), a wholly-owned subsidiary of Education Media and Publishing 
Group Limited ("EMPG" or "Former Parent") formed through the combination of Houghton Mifflin 
and Harcourt Education (both education learning companies) and Riverdeep Group Limited, a 
digital publishing business.  Throughout the notes to the consolidated financial statements, both 
HMH and HMH Publishing are referred to collectively as the “Company”. 

The accompanying consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with 
principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”). All intercompany accounts 
and transactions have been eliminated.   

Seasonality and Comparability  
Our net sales, operating profit and operating cash flows are impacted by the inherent seasonality of 
the academic calendar.  Consequently, the performance of our businesses may not be comparable 
quarter to consecutive quarter and should be considered on the basis of results for the whole year 
or by comparing results in a quarter with results in the same quarter for the previous year. 

Schools make most of their purchases in the second and third quarters of the calendar year in 
preparation for the beginning of the school year.  Thus, over the past three years, approximately 
69% of consolidated net sales have historically been realized in the second and third quarters.  
Sales of K-12 instructional materials and customized testing products are also cyclical, with some 
years offering more sales opportunities than others.  The amount of funding available at the state 
level for educational materials also has a significant effect on year-to-year revenue.  Although the 
loss of a single customer would not have a material adverse effect on our business, schedules of 
school adoptions and market acceptance of our products can materially affect year-to-year revenue 
performance. 

Chapter 11 Reorganization 
On May 10, 2012, we entered into a Restructuring Support Agreement (“Plan Support Agreement”) 
with consenting creditors holding greater than 74% of the principal amount of the outstanding senior 
secured indebtedness of the Company and with equity owners holding approximately 64% of the 
Company’s outstanding common stock.  The consenting creditors agreed to support the Company’s 
Pre-Packaged Chapter 11 Plan of Reorganization (“Plan”).  Pursuant to the Plan Support 
Agreement, the Company agreed to use its best efforts to (i) support and complete the restructuring 
and all transactions contemplated by the Plan (as defined below), (ii) take any and all necessary 
and appropriate actions in furtherance of the restructuring contemplated under the Plan, (iii) 
complete the restructuring and all transactions contemplated under the Plan within set time-frames, 
(iv) obtain any and all required regulatory and/or third-party approvals for the restructuring, and (v) 
not directly or indirectly, seek, solicit, support, or engage in the negotiation or formulation of 
alternate plans of reorganization that were inconsistent with the reorganization as contemplated by 
the Plan Support Agreement. 

57 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

On May 21, 2012 (the “Petition Date”), the U.S. based entities that borrowed or guaranteed the debt 
of the Company (collectively the “Debtors”), filed voluntary petitions for relief under Chapter 11 of 
the federal bankruptcy laws in the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New 
York (“Court”).  Concurrently therewith, the Debtors also filed the Plan, the Disclosure Statement in 
support of the Plan and filed various motions seeking relief to continue operations.  Following the 
Petition Date, the Debtors operated their business as “debtors in possession” (“DIP”) under the 
jurisdiction of the Court and in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Bankruptcy Code 
and orders of the Court.  Under Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code (“Chapter 11”), 
certain claims against us in existence before the Petition Date were stayed while we operated our 
business as a DIP including any actions that might be commenced with regards to secured claims, 
although the holders of such claims had the right to move the Court for relief from the stay.  
Subsequent to the Petition Date, these claims were reflected in the balance sheet as liabilities 
subject to compromise.  Secured claims were secured primarily by liens on the Company’s 
accounts receivable.  Additional claims (liabilities subject to compromise) could have potentially 
arisen after the filing date resulting from rejection of executory contracts or from the determination 
by the Court (or agreed to by parties in interest).   

On June 22, 2012, the Company successfully emerged from bankruptcy as a reorganized company 
pursuant to the Plan.  Ultimately, the Debtors did not reject any executory contracts during the 
bankruptcy case, and the Company continues to review and reconcile claims that were filed against 
it by creditors.       

March 2010 Restructuring 
As a result of lower than expected operating results beginning in the latter half of 2008 and 
continuing through 2009, primarily due to a downturn in the economy and state budget deficits 
adversely affecting many of our customers, we failed several of our debt covenants and faced 
liquidity constraints.  Waivers were obtained from our first lien lenders and mezzanine lenders for 
the covenant violations through March 9, 2010. 

On March 9, 2010, the Company and its first lien and mezzanine lenders and its shareholders 
consummated a restructuring of the Company (the “Restructuring”).  As part of the Restructuring, a 
new legal entity was formed, HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc., to hold all of the assets of the 
operating companies.  On March 9, 2010, the then-existing senior secured lenders in the first lien 
credit facility received 90% (pre-dilution from the rights offering noted below) of the equity in HMH, 
in exchange for converting $1,983.7 million of their senior secured position in the first lien credit 
agreement to equity in HMH.  The then-existing mezzanine lenders received 10% of the equity of 
HMH (pre-dilution from the rights offering) and 40,519,431 warrants at a strike price of $12.26, in 
exchange for converting all of their $2,124.8 million subordinated secured position in the 
mezzanine credit agreement to equity.  The former shareholder, EMPG, cancelled its equity 
ownership in the Company in exchange for 18,956,473 warrants with a strike price of $22.32.   

Additionally, on March 9, 2010, HMH raised $650.0 million of new equity capital through a rights 
offering from the then-existing senior secured and mezzanine lenders who agreed to convert a 
portion of their first lien and mezzanine positions to equity.  The proceeds were used to pay 
transaction fees, accrued interest and fund working capital needs. 

As a result of this change in control, we applied the acquisition method of accounting, as required 
by authoritative literature.  Accordingly, the consolidated financial statements prior to the closing of 
the Restructuring reflect the historical accounting basis in the assets and liabilities and are labeled 
Predecessor Company, while such records subsequent to the Restructuring are labeled Successor 
Company and reflect the fair values determined as part of applying the acquisition method.  This is 
presented in the consolidated financial statements by a vertical black line division which appears 
between the columns labeled Predecessor and Successor in the financial statements and the 

58 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

relevant notes.  The black line signifies that the periods prior to the Restructuring are not 
comparable. 

A valuation was performed to determine the acquisition price using the Income Approach 
employing a Discounted Cash Flow (“DCF”) methodology.  The DCF method explicitly recognizes 
that the value of a business enterprise is equal to the present value of the cash flows that are 
expected to be available for distribution to the equity and/or debt holders of a company.  In the 
valuation of a business enterprise, indications of value are developed by discounting future net 
cash flows available for distribution to their present worth at a rate that reflects both the current 
return requirements of the market and the risk inherent in the specific investment. 

We used a multi-year DCF model to derive a Total Invested Capital value which was adjusted for 
cash, non-operating assets, debt and any negative net working capital to calculate a Business 
Enterprise Value of approximately $5.0 billion which was then used to value our equity.  In 
connection with the Income Approach portion of this exercise, we made the following assumptions: 
(1) the discount rate was based on an average of a range of scenarios with rates between 8.6% 
and 11.4%; (2) management’s estimates of future performance of our operations; and (3) a 
terminal growth rate of 3.5%.  The discount rate and market growth rate reflect the risks associated 
with the general economic pressure impacting both the economy in general and more specifically 
the publishing industry.  Costs and professional fees incurred as part of the refinancing totaled 
$43.7 million and were recorded in other assets and long-term receivables in the Predecessor 
Company and were treated as a reduction to the equity value in the Successor Company. 

59 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

We finalized the valuation and completed the allocation of the business enterprise value.  The 
allocation of the business enterprise value at March 10, 2010 was as follows: 

Cash and cash equivalents
Accounts receivable
Inventories
Note receivable - related party
Prepaid expenses and other assets
Property, plant, and equipment
Pre-publication costs
Royalty advances to authors
Goodwill
Other intangible assets
Other assets 
Accounts payable
Royalties payable
Salaries, wages, and commissions payable
Deferred revenue
Interest payable
Interest rate swap liability
Severance and other charges
Accrued postretirement benefits
Other liabilities
Debt
Royalties payable
Accrued pension benefits
Accrued postretirement benefits
Deferred income taxes
Other liabilities
Total net assets 

$              

22,995
222,213
380,243
73
12,191
128,282
463,459
44,415
1,935,965
2,108,538
9,123
(105,688)
(34,621)
(46,872)
(107,609)
(30,517)
(121,891)
(62,157)
(2,443)
(124,761)
(3,009,212)
(3,243)
(80,026)
(31,526)
(153,003)
(37,363)
1,376,565

$          

Subsequent Events 
The Company has performed an evaluation of subsequent events through March 29, 2013, which 
is the date the financial statements were issued. 

2. 

Chapter 11 Reorganization Disclosures  

As discussed in Note 1, the Company filed voluntary petitions for relief under Chapter 11.  On June 
21, 2012, the Bankruptcy Court entered an order confirming and approving the Plan for the Debtors 
and the Plan became effective and the transactions contemplated under the Plan were 
consummated on June 22, 2012.  

Subsequent to the Petition Date, the provisions in U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles 
guidance for reorganizations applied to the Company’s financial statements while it operated under 
the provisions of Chapter 11.  The accounting guidance did not change the application of generally 
accepted accounting principles in the preparation of financial statements.  However, it does require 
that the financial statements, for periods including and subsequent to the filing of the Chapter 11 
petition, distinguish transactions and events that are directly associated with the reorganization 
from the ongoing operations of the business.  Accordingly, all transactions (including, but not limited 
to, all professional fees, realized gains and losses and provisions for losses) directly associated 
with the reorganization and restructuring of our businesses are reported separately in the financial 

60 

 
 
 
 
              
              
                      
                
              
              
                
            
            
                  
             
               
               
             
               
             
               
                 
             
           
                 
               
               
             
               
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

statements.  All such expense or income amounts are reported in reorganization items in the 
accompanying consolidated statements of operations for the year ended December 31, 2012.     

Summary of Emergence 
On June 22, 2012, the Company successfully emerged from bankruptcy as a reorganized company 
pursuant to the Plan after voluntarily filing for bankruptcy on May 21, 2012.  The financial 
restructuring realized by the confirmation of the Plan was accomplished through a debt-for-equity 
exchange.  The Plan deleveraged the Company’s balance sheet by eliminating the Company’s 
secured indebtedness in exchange for new equity in the Company.  Existing stockholders, in their 
capacity as stockholders, received warrants for the new equity in the Company in exchange for the 
existing equity.   

Upon the Company’s emergence from Chapter 11 bankruptcy proceedings on June 22, 2012, the 
Company was not required to apply fresh-start accounting based on U.S. Generally Accepted 
Accounting Principles guidance for reorganizations due to the fact that the pre-petition holders who 
owned more than 50% of the Company’s outstanding common shares immediately before 
confirmation of the Plan received more than 50% of the Company’s outstanding common stock 
upon emergence.  Accordingly, a new reporting entity was not created for accounting purposes. 

Below is a summary of the significant transactions affecting the Company’s capital structure as a 
result of the effectiveness of the Plan. 

Equity Transactions 
On June 22, 2012, pursuant to the Plan, all of the issued and outstanding shares of common stock 
of the Company, including all options, warrants or any other agreements to acquire shares of 
common stock of the Company that existed prior to the Petition Date, were cancelled and in 
exchange, holders of such interests received distributions pursuant to the terms of the Plan.  As of 
June 22, 2012, the authorized capital stock of the Company consists of (i) 190,000,000 shares of 
common stock, of which 69,958,989 shares of common stock are issued and outstanding at 
December 31, 2012, 3,684,211 shares of common stock which are reserved for issuance upon 
exercise of warrants, and 8,187,135 shares of common stock which are reserved for issuance upon 
exercise of certain other warrants and awards to be issued by the Company under the MIP (defined 
below) and (ii) 10,000,000 shares of preferred stock, $0.01 par value per share, of which no shares 
are issued and outstanding.  There are no other outstanding obligations, warrants, options, or other 
rights to subscribe for or purchase from the Company any class of capital stock of the Company.      

On June 22, 2012, the Company issued an aggregate of 70,000,000 post-emergence shares of 
new common stock pursuant to the final Plan on a pro rata basis to the holders of the then-existing 
first lien term loan (the “Term Loan”), of which 41,011 are treasury shares as of December 31, 
2012, the then-existing first lien revolving loan facility (the “Revolving Loan”), and 10.5% Senior 
Notes as of the Petition Date.  The Company relied on Section 1145(a)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code 
to exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the issuance of such 
new common stock.   

A new Management Incentive Plan (“MIP”) became effective upon emergence.  The MIP provides 
for grants of options and restricted stock at a strike price equal to or greater than the fair market 
value per share of common stock as of the date of the grant and reserved for management and 
employees up to 10% of the new common stock of the Company.  During 2012, the Company 
granted to certain employees, including executive officers, stock options totaling 4,912,281 shares 
of the Company’s common stock.  Each of the stock options granted have an exercise price equal 
to the fair market value and generally vest over a three or four year period.  During 2012, the 
Company granted 22,200 restricted stock units to independent directors which generally vest over a 

61 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

one year period.  As of December 31, 2012, there are 3,252,654 shares reserved for issuance 
under the MIP.  

In accordance with the Plan, each existing common stockholder received its pro rata share of 
warrants to purchase 5% of the common stock of the Company, subject to dilution for equity awards 
issued in connection with the MIP.  The exercise price for the warrants is based upon a $3.1 billion 
enterprise valuation of the Company, and the warrants have a term of seven years.  All of the then-
existing common stock was extinguished on the effective date of the Plan.  As of December 31, 
2012, there are 3,684,211 shares reserved for issuance upon the exercise of such warrants.  These 
warrants are referred to as the “New Warrants.”    

Debt Transactions 
On June 22, 2012, the Company’s creditors converted the First Lien Credit Agreement consisting of 
the Term Loan with an aggregate outstanding principal balance of $2.6 billion and the Revolving 
Loan with an aggregate outstanding principal balance of $235.8 million, and the outstanding $300.0 
million principal amount of 10.5% Senior Notes to 100 percent pro rata ownership of the Company’s 
common stock, subject to dilution pursuant to the MIP and the exercise of the New Warrants 
(described previously), and received $30.3 million in cash. 

In connection with the Chapter 11 filing on May 22, 2012, the Company entered into a new $500.0 
million senior secured credit facility (DIP facility), which converted into an exit facility on the 
effective date of the emergence from Chapter 11.  This exit facility consists of a $250.0 million 
revolving credit facility, which is secured by the Company’s accounts receivable and inventory, and 
a $250.0 million term loan credit facility.  The proceeds of the exit facility were used to fund the 
costs of the reorganization and are providing working capital to the Company since its emergence 
from Chapter 11.    

A summary of the transactions affecting the Company’s debt balances is as follows: 

Debt balance prior to emergence from bankruptcy (including accrued interest)

Exchange of debt for new common shares
Elimination of debt discount and deferred financing fees
Adequate protection payments
Conversion fees
Professional fees

(Gain) loss on extinguishment

$          

$          

(3,142,234)
1,750,000
98,352
69,701
30,299
21,726
(1,172,156)

Reorganization Items 
Reorganization items represent expense or income amounts that were recorded in the 
consolidated financial statements as a result of the bankruptcy proceedings.  Reorganization items 
were incurred starting with the date of the bankruptcy filing through the date of bankruptcy 
emergence.  The gain from reorganization items for the year ended December 31, 2012 were as 
follows: 

62 

 
 
           
 
 
            
                 
                 
                 
                 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Adjusted to
Capital in excess
of par value

Reorganization
items, net

Total

$        

$            

Debt to equity conversion
Elimination of debt discount and deferred financing fees
Adequate protection payments
Conversion fees
Professional fees

(Gain) loss on extinguishment

Stock compensation
Issuance of warrants

Reorganization items, net

(1,392,234)
98,352
69,701
30,299
21,726
(1,172,156)
2,027
10,747
(1,159,382)

$            

(1,199,549)
84,740
60,054
26,106
18,381
(1,010,268)

-
-

$             

(1,010,268)

$         

$             

(192,685)
13,612
9,647
4,193
3,345
(161,888)
2,027
10,747
(149,114)

Liabilities Subject to Compromise 
Certain pre-petition liabilities and indebtedness were subject to compromise under the Plan and 
were reported at amounts allowed or expected to be allowed by the Court.  A summary of liabilities 
subject to compromise reflected in the consolidated balance sheet as of May 21, 2012 is as 
follows: 

May 21,
2012

$2,668,690 Term Loan due June 12, 2014
$235,751 Revolving Loan due December 12, 2013
$300,000 10.5% senior secured notes due June 1, 2019
Accrued interest
Total

$             

$             

2,570,815
235,751
300,000
35,668
3,142,234

As of December 31, 2012, there were no liabilities subject to compromise. 

All pre-petition claims were considered liabilities subject to compromise at May 21, 2012.  As 
discussed above, the Term Loan, the Revolving Loan, the 10.5% Senior Notes, and the associated 
accrued interest were exchanged for new common stock in the Company.  There were no other 
liabilities subject to compromise as of May 21, 2012.  We honored other prepetition obligations, 
including employee wages and trade payables in the ordinary course of business.   

3. 

Significant Accounting Policies 

Principles of Consolidation 
Our accompanying consolidated financial statements include the results of operations of the 
Company and our wholly-owned subsidiaries.  All material intercompany accounts and transactions 
are eliminated in consolidation. 

Use of Estimates 
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted 
in the United States of America requires the use of estimates, assumptions and judgments by 
management that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues, expenses, and 
related disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities in the amounts reported in the financial 
statements and accompanying notes.  On an ongoing basis, we evaluate our estimates and 
assumptions including, but not limited to, book returns, allowance for bad debts, recoverability of 
advances to authors, valuation of inventory, depreciation and amortization periods, recoverability of 

63 

 
               
                    
                 
               
                    
                  
               
                    
                  
               
                    
                  
          
              
              
                 
                         
                  
               
                         
                 
 
 
                  
                  
                    
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

long-term assets such as property, plant, and equipment, capitalized pre-publication costs, other 
identified intangibles, goodwill, deferred revenue, income taxes, pensions and other postretirement 
benefits, contingencies, and litigation.  We base our estimates on historical experience and on 
various other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of 
which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying value of assets and liabilities that are 
not readily apparent from other sources.  Actual results may differ from those estimates. 

Revenue Recognition 
We derive revenue primarily from the sale of print and digital textbooks and instructional materials, 
trade books, reference materials, multimedia instructional programs, license fees for book rights, 
content, software and services that include test development, test scoring, consulting and training. 
Revenue from print and digital textbooks and instructional materials, trade books, reference 
materials, assessment materials and multimedia instructional programs is recognized in the period 
when persuasive evidence of an arrangement with the customer exists, the products are shipped, 
title and risk of loss have transferred to the customer, all significant obligations have been 
performed and collection is reasonably assured.   

We enter into certain contractual arrangements that have multiple elements, one or more of which 
may be delivered subsequent to the initial sale.  These multiple deliverable arrangements may 
include print and digital media, professional development, training services, software, software as a 
service (SaaS), and various services related to the software including but not limited to hosting, 
maintenance and support, and implementation.  At the inception of these arrangements, 
consideration is allocated using the Relative Sales Value (RSV) method.  For each element, we 
determine whether the element falls under the accounting guidance within multiple element 
arrangements or software revenue recognition.  For elements which fall under the accounting 
guidance for multiple element arrangements, we apply the highest applicable relative selling price 
guidance available, Vendor Specific Objective Evidence (VSOE), Third Party Evidence (TPE), or 
Best Estimate of Selling Price (BESP).  For elements which fall under the accounting guidance for 
software revenue recognition, we apply VSOE and the residual method.  If we are not able to 
establish VSOE, we estimate relative selling price based on TPE or BESP for purposes of 
allocation of total project discount, and defer until all such elements are fulfilled assuming all other 
revenue recognition criteria have been met.  For multiple deliverable arrangements, fair value is 
determined for all elements and the relative sales value of revenue for items to be delivered after 
the initial sale is deferred until such time as the items are delivered.   A significant component of 
revenue that is deferred relates to gratis items delivered in connection with sales to customers 
within adoption states.  As our business model shifts to more digital and on-line learning 
components, additional revenue could be deferred.  As products are shipped with right of return, a 
provision for estimated returns on these sales is made at the time of sale based on historical 
experience.  

License fees for software products without future obligations are recognized upon delivery.  Certain 
contracts include software and on-going fees for maintenance and other support.  If VSOE of the 
fair value of each element of the arrangement exists, the elements of the contract are unbundled 
and the revenue is recognized for each element when or as delivered. Revenue for test delivery, 
test scoring and training are recognized when the services have been completed, the fee is fixed or 
determinable and collection is reasonably assured.  Revenue for test development is recognized as 
the services are provided.  Differences between what has been billed and what has been 
recognized as revenue is recorded as deferred revenue.  We enter into agreements to license 
certain book publishing rights and content.  We recognize revenue on such arrangements when all 
materials have been delivered to the customer and collection is reasonably assured. 

Advertising Costs and Sample Expenses 
Advertising costs are charged to selling and administrative expenses as incurred.  Advertising 
costs were $6.7 million and $7.4 million for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, 
respectively.  For the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010, advertising costs were $1.1 million 

64 

 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

and for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010 advertising costs were $5.1 million.    
Sample expenses are charged to selling and administrative expenses when the samples are 
shipped. 

Cash and Cash Equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents consist primarily of cash in banks and highly liquid investment 
securities that have maturities of three months or less when purchased.  The carrying amount of 
cash equivalents approximates fair value because of the short term maturity of these investments. 

Restricted Cash 
Restricted cash consists primarily of cash collateral for irrevocable standby letters of credit in 
connection with property that we currently lease and performance and surety bonds. 

Short-term Investments 
Short-term investments typically consist of marketable securities with maturities between three and 
twelve months at the balance sheet date.  We have classified all of our short-term investments as 
available-for-sale at December 31, 2012.  The investments are reported at fair value, with any 
unrealized gains or losses excluded from earnings and reported as a separate component of 
stockholders’ equity as other comprehensive income (loss). 

Accounts Receivable 
Accounts receivable are recorded net of allowances for doubtful accounts and reserves for book 
returns.  In the normal course of business, we extend credit to customers that satisfy predefined 
criteria.  We estimate the collectability of our receivables.  Allowances for doubtful accounts are 
established through the evaluation of accounts receivable aging and prior collection experience to 
estimate the ultimate collectability of these receivables.  Reserves for book returns are based on 
historical return rates and sales patterns. 

Inventories 
Inventories are stated at the lower of weighted average cost or net realizable value.  The level of 
obsolete and excess inventory is estimated on a program or title level-basis by comparing the 
number of units in stock with the expected future demand.  The expected future demand of a 
program or title is determined by the copyright year, the previous years’ sales history, the 
subsequent year’s sales forecast, known forward-looking trends including our development cycle to 
replace the title or program and competing titles or programs. 

Property, Plant, and Equipment 
Property, plant, and equipment are stated at cost, or in the case of assets acquired in business 
combinations, at fair value as of the acquisition date, less accumulated depreciation.  Equipment 
under capital lease is stated at fair value at inception of the lease, less accumulated depreciation.  
Maintenance and repair costs are charged to expense as incurred, and renewals and 
improvements that extend the useful life of the assets are capitalized. 

Depreciation on property, plant, and equipment is calculated using the straight-line method over the 
estimated useful lives of the assets or, in the case of assets acquired in business combinations, 
over their remaining lives.  Equipment held under capital leases and leasehold improvements are 
amortized using the straight-line method over the shorter of the lease term or estimated useful life 
of the asset.  Estimated useful lives of property, plant, and equipment are as follows: 

65 

 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Building and building equipment
Machinery and equipment
Capitalized software
Leasehold improvements

Estimated 
Useful Life

10 to 35 years
2 to 15 years
3 to 5 years
Lesser of useful life or lease term

Capitalized Internal-Use and External-Use Software 
Capitalized internal-use and external-use software is included in property, plant and equipment on 
the consolidated balance sheets.  

We capitalize certain costs related to obtaining or developing computer software for internal use.  
Costs incurred during the application development stage, including external direct costs of 
materials and services, and payroll and payroll related costs for employees who are directly 
associated with the internal-use software project, are capitalized and amortized on a straight-line 
basis over the expected useful life of the related software.  The application development stage 
includes design, software configuration and integration, coding, hardware installation and testing.  
Costs incurred during the preliminary stage, as well as maintenance, training and upgrades that do 
not result in additional functionality are expensed as incurred. 

Certain computer software development costs for software that is to be sold or marketed are 
capitalized in the consolidated balance sheets.  Capitalization of computer software development 
costs begins upon the establishment of technological feasibility.  We define the establishment of 
technological feasibility as a working model.  Amortization of capitalized computer software 
development costs is provided on a product-by-product basis using the straight-line method, 
beginning upon commercial release of the product, and continuing over the remaining estimated 
economic life of the product.  The carrying amounts of computer software development costs are 
periodically compared to net realizable value and impairment charges are recorded, as appropriate, 
when amounts expected to be realized are lower. 

66 

 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

We review internal and external software development costs for impairment.  For the year ended 
December 31, 2012 and 2011, software development costs of $2.6 million and $5.6 million, 
respectively, were impaired. For the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 software 
development costs of $4.0 million were impaired.  There were no software development cost 
impairments for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010.  All impairments were included 
as a charge to the statement of operations in the impairment charge for goodwill, intangible assets, 
pre-publication costs and fixed assets caption. 

Pre-publication costs 
We capitalize the art, prepress, manuscript and other costs incurred in the creation of the master 
copy of a book or other media (the “pre-publication costs”).  Pre-publication costs are primarily 
amortized from the year of copyright, or sale if earlier, over five years using the sum-of-the-years-
digits method.  This policy is used throughout the Company, except for the Trade Publishing 
consumer books, which expenses such costs as incurred, and the assessment products, which 
uses the straight-line amortization method.  The amortization methods and periods chosen best 
reflect the pattern of expected sales generated from individual titles or programs.  We periodically 
evaluate the remaining lives and recoverability of capitalized pre-publication costs, which are often 
dependent upon program acceptance by state adoption authorities. 

Amortization expense related to pre-publication costs for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 
2011 were $137.7 million and $176.8 million, respectively.  For the period January 1, 2010 to 
March 9, 2010 amortization expense related to pre-publication costs was $37.9 million and for the 
period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010 amortization expense related to pre-publication costs 
was $181.5 million 

Pre-publication costs recorded on the balance sheet are periodically reviewed for impairment by 
comparing the unamortized capitalized costs of the assets to the fair value of those assets.  For the 
years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010, and the 
period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010, pre-publication costs of $0.4 million, $33.5 million, 
zero and $16.9 million, respectively, were deemed to be impaired.  The impairment was included 
as a charge to the statement of operations in the impairment charge for goodwill, intangible assets, 
pre-publication costs and fixed assets caption.  

Goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets 
Goodwill is the excess of the purchase price paid over the fair value of the net assets of the 
business acquired.  Other intangible assets principally consist of branded trademarks and trade 
names, acquired publishing rights and customer relationships.  Goodwill and indefinite-lived 
intangible assets (certain trade names) are not amortized but are reviewed at least annually for 
impairment or earlier, if an indication of impairment exists.  Recoverability of goodwill and indefinite 
lived intangibles is evaluated using a two-step process.  In the first step, the fair value of a reporting 
unit is compared to its carrying value.  If the fair value of a reporting unit exceeds the carrying value 
of the net assets assigned to a reporting unit, goodwill is considered not impaired and no further 
testing is required.  If the carrying value of the net assets assigned to a reporting unit exceeds the 
fair value of a reporting unit, the second step of the impairment test is performed in order to 
determine the implied fair value of a reporting unit’s goodwill.  Determining the implied fair value of 
goodwill requires valuation of a reporting unit’s tangible and intangible assets and liabilities in a 
manner similar to the allocation of purchase price in a business combination.  If the carrying value 
of a reporting unit’s goodwill exceeds its implied fair value, goodwill is deemed impaired and is 
written down to the extent of the difference.  We estimate total fair value of each reporting unit 
using discounted cash flow analysis, and make assumptions regarding future revenue, gross 
margins, working capital levels, investments in new products, capital spending, tax, cash flows and 
the terminal value of the reporting unit.  With regard to other intangibles with indefinite lives, we 

67 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

determine the fair value by asset, which is then compared to its carrying value to determine if the 
assets are impaired.  

Goodwill is allocated entirely to our Education reporting unit.  Determining the fair value of a 
reporting unit is judgmental in nature, and involves the use of significant estimates and 
assumptions.  These estimates and assumptions may include revenue growth rates and operating 
margins used to calculate projected future cash flows, risk-adjusted discount rates, future economic 
and market conditions, the determination of appropriate market comparables as well as the fair 
value of individual assets and liabilities.  Consistent with prior years, we used an income approach 
to establish the fair value of the reporting unit as of October 1, 2012.  As in prior years, we used the 
most recent five year strategic plan as the initial basis of our analysis.   

We completed our annual goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible asset impairment tests as of 
October 1, 2012, 2011, and 2010 and recorded a noncash impairment charge of $5.0 million for the 
year ended December 31, 2012, $1,635.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 and $87.0 
million for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010. There was no impairment for the 
period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010. The impairments principally related to one specific 
tradename within the Education business in 2012, goodwill and tradenames within the Education 
business in 2011, and related to tradenames within the Education business and Trade Division in 
2010.  The impairment charges resulted primarily from a decline in revenue from previously 
projected amounts as a result of the economic downturn and reduced educational spending by 
states and school districts.   

Publishing Rights 
A publishing right is an acquired right that allows us to publish and republish existing and future 
works as well as create new works based on previously published materials.  We determine the fair 
market value of the publishing rights arising from business combinations by discounting the after-
tax cash flows projected to be derived from the publishing rights and titles to their net present value 
using a rate of return that accounts for the time value of money and the appropriate degree of risk.  
The useful life of the publishing rights is based on the lives of the various copyrights involved.  We 
calculate amortization using the percentage of the projected operating income before taxes derived 
from the titles in the current year as a percentage of the total estimated operating income before 
taxes over the remaining useful life.  Acquired publication rights, as well as customer-related 
intangibles with definitive lives, are primarily amortized on an accelerated basis over periods 
ranging from three to 20 years. 

Impairment of other long-lived assets 
We review our other long-lived assets for impairment whenever events or changes in 
circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be fully recoverable.  If the 
future undiscounted cash flows are less than their book value, impairment exists.  The impairment 
is measured as the difference between the book value and the fair value of the underlying asset.  
Fair value is normally determined using a discounted cash flow model. 

Severance 
We accrue postemployment benefits if the obligation is attributable to services already rendered, 
rights to those benefits accumulate, payment of benefits is probable, and amount of benefit is 
reasonably estimated.  Postemployment benefits include severance benefits. 

Subsequent to recording such accrued severance liabilities, changes in market or other conditions 
may result in changes to assumptions upon which the original liabilities were recorded that could 
result in an adjustment to the liabilities.  

68 

 
 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Royalty advances 
Royalty advances to authors are capitalized and represent amounts paid in advance of the sale of 
an author’s product and are recovered as earned.  As advances are recorded, a partial reserve 
may be recorded immediately based primarily upon historical sales experience.  Advances are 
evaluated periodically to determine if they are expected to be recovered.  Any portion of a royalty 
advance that is not expected to be recovered is fully reserved. 

Income taxes 
We record income taxes using the asset and liability method.  Deferred income tax assets and 
liabilities are recognized for future tax consequences attributable to differences between the 
financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective income 
tax basis, and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards.  Our consolidated financial statements 
contain certain deferred tax assets which have arisen primarily as a result of interest expense 
limitations, as well as other temporary differences between financial and tax accounting.  We 
establish a valuation allowance if the likelihood of realization of the deferred tax assets is reduced 
based on an evaluation of objective verifiable evidence.  Significant management judgment is 
required in determining our provision for income taxes, our deferred tax assets and liabilities and 
any valuation allowance recorded against those deferred tax assets.  We evaluate the weight of all 
available evidence to determine whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the 
deferred income tax assets will not be realized. 

We also evaluate any uncertain tax positions and only recognize the tax benefit from an uncertain 
tax position if it is more likely than not that the tax position will be sustained on examination by the 
taxing authorities, based on the technical merits of the position.  The tax benefits recognized in the 
financial statements from such positions are then measured based on the largest benefit that has a 
greater than 50 percent likelihood of being realized upon settlement.  We record a liability for 
unrecognized tax benefits resulting from uncertain tax positions taken or expected to be taken in a 
tax return.  Any change in judgment related to the expected ultimate resolution of uncertain tax 
positions is recognized in earnings in the period in which such change occurs.  Interest and 
penalties, if any, related to unrecognized tax benefits are recorded in income tax expense. 

Share-Based Compensation 
Certain employees and or directors have been granted stock options and restricted stock awards in 
both the predecessor and successor companys’ common stock.  Stock based compensation 
expense reflects the fair value of stock-based awards measured at the grant date and recognized 
over the relevant service period.  We estimate the fair value of each stock-based award on the 
measurement date using either the current market price or the Black-Scholes option valuation 
model.  The Black-Scholes option valuation model incorporates assumptions as to stock volatility, 
the expected life of the options, risk-free interest rate and dividend yield for time-vested stock 
options and restricted stock.  We recognize compensation cost on a straight-line basis over the 
awards' vesting periods. 

Comprehensive Income (Loss) 
Comprehensive income (loss) is defined as changes in the equity of an enterprise except those 
resulting from stockholder transactions.  The amounts shown on the consolidated statements of 
stockholders’ equity (deficit) and comprehensive income (loss) relate to the cumulative effect of 
changes in pension liabilities, foreign currency translation gain and loss adjustments, and 
unrealized gains and losses on short-term investments. 

Foreign Currency Translation 
The functional currency for each of our subsidiaries is the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which the subsidiary operates, generally defined as the currency in which the entity 
generates and expends cash.  Foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities are translated 

69 

 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

into United States dollars at current rates as of the balance sheet date and the revenue, costs and 
expenses are translated at the average rates established during each reporting period.  Cumulative 
translation gains or losses are recorded in equity as an element of accumulated other 
comprehensive income. 

Financial instruments 
Derivative financial instruments are employed to manage risks associated with interest rate 
exposures and are not used for trading or speculative purposes.  We recognize all derivative 
instruments, such as interest rate swap agreements, in our consolidated balance sheets at fair 
value.  Changes in the fair value of derivatives are recognized periodically either in earnings or in 
stockholders’ equity (deficit) as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), 
depending on whether the derivative financial instrument qualifies for hedge accounting and, if so, 
whether it qualifies as a fair value hedge or a cash flow hedge.  Gains and losses on derivatives 
designated as hedges, to the extent they are effective, are recorded in other comprehensive 
income, and subsequently reclassified to earnings to offset the impact of the hedged items when 
they occur.  Changes in the fair value of derivatives not qualifying as hedges are reported in 
earnings.  Our interest rate swap agreements that existed during 2010 and terminated upon 
expiration did not qualify for hedge accounting because we did not contemporaneously document 
our hedging strategy upon entering into the hedging arrangements.  The net interest paid or 
received on interest rate swaps is recognized within net interest expense in the consolidated 
statement of operations.  There were no derivative instruments that qualified for hedge accounting 
during 2011 and 2012. 

Treasury Stock 
We account for treasury stock under the cost method.  When shares are reissued or retired from 
treasury stock they are accounted for at an average price.  Upon retirement the excess over par 
value is charged against capital in excess of par value.   

Recent Accounting Pronouncements 
Recent accounting pronouncements, not included below, are not expected to have a material 
impact on our consolidated financial position and results of operations. 

In May 2011, the FASB issued new guidance for fair value measurements intended to achieve 
common fair value measurement and disclosure requirements in U.S. GAAP and International 
Financial Reporting Standards.  The amended guidance provides a consistent definition of fair 
value to ensure that the fair value measurement and disclosure requirements are similar between 
U.S. GAAP and International Financial Reporting Standards. The amended guidance changes 
certain fair value measurement principles and enhances the disclosure requirements, particularly 
for Level 3 fair value measurements.  On January 1, 2012, we adopted the amended guidance for 
fair value measurements.  The changes did not have a significant impact on our financial position, 
results of operations or cash flows.        

In June 2011, the FASB issued guidance that modified how comprehensive income is presented in 
an entity’s financial statements. The guidance issued requires an entity to present the total of 
comprehensive income, the components of net income, and the components of other 
comprehensive income either in a single continuous statement of comprehensive income or in two 
separate but consecutive statements and eliminates the option to present the components of other 
comprehensive income as part of the statement of equity.  On January 1, 2012, we adopted the 
comprehensive income guidance and disclosed the components of comprehensive income in a 
separate statement. 

In September 2011, the FASB issued new guidance to simplify how entities test goodwill for 
impairment.  The amended guidance permits an entity to first assess qualitative factors to 
determine whether it is more likely than not (that is, a likelihood of more than 50 percent) that the 

70 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount.  If this is the case, companies will 
need to perform a more detailed two-step goodwill impairment test which is used to identify 
potential goodwill impairments and to measure the amount of goodwill impairment losses to be 
recognized, if any.  The amended guidance was effective for us beginning January 1, 2012.  The 
adoption of this update did not have a material impact on our financial statements. 

In July 2012, the FASB issued an accounting standard update that amends the accounting 
guidance on testing indefinite-lived intangible assets for impairment.  The amendments in this 
accounting standard update are intended to reduce complexity and costs by allowing an entity the 
option to make a qualitative evaluation about the likelihood that an indefinite-lived intangible asset 
is impaired to determine whether it should perform a quantitative impairment test.  The 
amendments also enhance the consistency of impairment testing guidance among long-lived asset 
categories by permitting an entity to assess qualitative factors to determine whether it is necessary 
to calculate the asset’s fair value when testing an indefinite-lived intangible asset for impairment, 
which is equivalent to the impairment testing requirements for other long-lived assets.  The 
amendments in this accounting standard update are effective for interim and annual impairment 
tests performed for fiscal years beginning after September 15, 2012. We test indefinite-lived 
intangible assets for impairment annually on October 1 or more frequently when events or changes 
in circumstances indicate that impairment may have occurred.  The accounting standard update will 
be effective for us beginning in 2013.  We believe the adoption of this update will not have a 
material impact on our financial statements. 

4. 

Acquisitions 

On November 5, 2012, we acquired certain asset product lines from a third party for a total 
purchase price of approximately $11.0 million, which was paid in cash at closing.  The acquisition 
provides us with the copyrights, trademarks and intellectual property of the acquired product lines 
for our Trade Publishing business.  In connection with the acquisition, we entered into a transition 
services agreement whereby the third party will provide certain transitional services to us for the 
acquired product lines.  Since the fair value assigned to the net assets acquired exceeded the 
consideration paid, we recorded a $30.8 million gain on bargain purchase on the transaction in 
2012.  Intangible assets, author advances, and other assets recorded as part of the acquisition 
totaled approximately $30.4 million, $6.2 million, and $5.1 million, respectively.   

Prior Year Acquisitions 
During 2011, we reduced the accrued contingent consideration recorded for one of our 2010 
acquisitions by $6.3 million, as we determined we would not able to achieve certain EBITDA growth 
targets and the projections for future growth were much lower than originally anticipated.  In 
accordance with the accounting guidance relating to the subsequent remeasurement of contingent 
consideration, the amount was recorded as a decrease to the selling and administrative expenses 
caption in our statement of operations for the year ended December 31, 2011.    

During 2011, we completed two acquisitions for a total purchase price of approximately $6.5 million, 
which is net of cash acquired.  The purchase price consisted of approximately $5.6 million of cash 
at closing and $0.9 million of accrued contingent consideration.  The acquisitions provide us with 
English as a second language course material for the international markets.  

During 2010, we completed two acquisitions for a total purchase price of approximately $28.3 
million, which is net of cash acquired.  The purchase price consisted of approximately $12.9 million 
of cash at closing, installment payments due over 5 years with a net present value of approximately 
$4.1 million, and approximately $11.6 million of accrued contingent consideration.  The acquisitions 
provided us with a suite of educational technology software for students along with consulting 
services to school districts throughout the United States.   

71 

 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

The 2011 and 2010 transactions were accounted for under the acquisition method of accounting.  
We allocated the purchase price to each company’s assets and liabilities assumed at estimated fair 
values as of the acquisition dates.  The excess of the purchase price over the net amounts 
assigned to the fair value of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed was recorded as goodwill.  
Goodwill and intangible assets recorded as part of the acquisitions totaled approximately $6.5 
million and $0 in 2011 and $20.1 million and $6.9 million in 2010, respectively.  The financial results 
of each company acquired were included within our financial statements from their respective dates 
of acquisition.  The acquisitions were not considered to be material for purposes of additional 
disclosure.   

5. 

Balance Sheet Information 

Short-term Investments 
The estimated fair value of our short-term investments classified as available for sale, is as follows: 

Short-term investments:

U.S. Government and agency securities

December 31, 2012

Amortized
Cost

Unrealized
Gains

Unrealized
Losses

Estimated
Fair Value

$   
$   

146,029
146,029

$            
$            

12
12

$               
-
$               
-

$   
$   

146,041
146,041

The contractual maturities of our short-term investments are one year or less.   

Account Receivable 
Accounts receivable at December 31, 2012 and 2011 consisted of the following: 

Accounts receivable

Allowance for bad debt

Reserve for returns

2012

2011

$       

265,477

$       

300,181

(10,575)

(25,784)

(18,296)

(25,614)

$       

229,118

$       

256,271

72 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Inventories 
Inventories at December 31, 2012 and 2011 consisted of the following: 

Finished goods

Raw materials

Inventory

2012

2011

$       

192,382

$       

236,350

5,231

5,812

$       

197,613

$       

242,162

Property, Plant, and Equipment 
Balances of major classes of assets and accumulated depreciation and amortization at 
December 31, 2012 and 2011 were as follows: 

Land and land improvements

Building and building equipment

Machinery and equipment

Capitalized software

Leasehold improvements

2012

2011

$           

6,629

$           

6,629

16,512

44,384

222,799

23,831

314,155

16,322

37,452

176,276

22,131

258,810

Less:  Accumulated depreciation and amortization

(164,928)

(106,598)

Property, plant, and equipment, net

$      

149,227

$      

152,212

For the year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, depreciation and amortization expense related 
to property, plant, and equipment were $58.1 million and $58.4 million, respectively.  Depreciation 
and amortization expense for the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 was $10.9 million and 
for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010 was $48.6 million.  

Property, plant, and equipment at December 31, 2012 include approximately $5.3 million acquired 
under capital lease agreements of which the majority is included in machinery and equipment.  The 
future minimum lease payments required under non-cancelable capital leases as of December 31, 
2012 is as follows:  $1.7 million in 2013, $1.7 million in 2014, $1.6 million in 2015, and $0.9 million 
in 2016.     

Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss) 
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) consisted of the following at December 31, 2012 
and 2011: 

Net change in pension and benefit plan liability

$       

(18,664)

$       

(21,042)

2012

2011

Foreign currency translation adjustments

Unrealized gain on short-term investments

(2,877)

13

(2,412)

1

$       

(21,528)

$       

(23,453)

73 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

6. 

Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets 

Goodwill and other intangible assets consisted of the following: 

December 31, 2012

December 31, 2011

Cost

Accumulated 
Amortization

Cost

Accumulated 
Amortization

Goodwill
Trademarks and tradenames
Publishing rights
Customer related and other

$       

520,088
440,505
1,180,000
271,150
2,411,743

$    

-
$                   
-
(644,348)
(180,255)
(824,603)

$       

$       

520,088
440,805
1,180,000
245,470
2,386,363

$    

-
$                   
-
(466,601)
(125,461)
(592,062)

$       

The changes in the carrying amount of goodwill for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 
are as follows: 

Balance at December 31, 2010
Acquisitions
Impairment losses
Balance at December 31, 2011
Goodwill
Accumulated impairment losses
Balance at December 31, 2011
Goodwill
Accumulated impairment losses
Balance at December 31, 2012

$     

1,956,071
6,517
(1,442,500)
520,088
1,962,588
(1,442,500)
520,088
1,962,588
(1,442,500)
520,088

$       

We had goodwill of $520.1 million at December 31, 2012 and 2011.  The additions to goodwill 
relate to our acquisitions described in Note 4 of approximately $6.5 million for the year ended 
December 31, 2011.  The decrease in goodwill of $1,442.5 million for the year ended December 
31, 2011 was due to goodwill impairment charges.  There was no goodwill impairment charge for 
the year ended December 31, 2012, for the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010, or for the 
period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010. 

In accordance with the provisions of the accounting standard for goodwill and other intangible 
assets, goodwill and certain indefinite-lived tradenames are not amortized.  We recorded an 
impairment charge of approximately $5.0 million, $192.6 million, and $87.0 million for certain of our 
intangible assets at October 1, 2012, 2011, and 2010, respectively.  Amortization expense for 
publishing rights and customer related and other intangibles were $232.6 and $298.0 million for the 
year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.  Amortization expense for publishing rights 
and customer related and other intangibles were $50.3 million for the period January 1, 2010 to 
March 9, 2010, and $293.6 million for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010. 

On October 5, 2011, we entered into an agreement with EMPG International Limited (“EMPGI”), a 
former related party, to terminate the 2008 license agreement between us and EMPGI.  The 
license agreement had provided EMPGI the rights to translate and prepare localized versions of 
substantially all of our products, as well as change or create derivative versions and redistribute 
such products in territories outside of our current presence.  As a result of entering into the 
agreement, certain international intellectual property rights were obtained for consideration of a 
one-time payment of $30.0 million.  This amount has been capitalized within other intangible assets 
and is being amortized over a 20 year life.  

74 

 
         
         
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Estimated aggregate amortization expense expected for each of the next five years related to 
intangibles subject to amortization is as follows: 

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

Thereafter

7. 

Debt  

Other

Publishing

Intangible

Rights

Assets

$      

139,588

$        

18,421

105,624

81,007

61,350

46,238

101,845

10,044

10,267

9,372

8,765

34,026

As described in Note 2, pursuant to the Plan, the holders of the Company’s debt converted the First 
Lien Credit Agreement consisting of the Term Loan with an aggregate outstanding principal 
balance of $2.6 billion and the Revolving Loan with an aggregate outstanding principal balance of 
$235.8 million, and the outstanding $300.0 million principal amount of 10.5% Senior Notes to 100 
percent pro rata ownership of the Company’s common stock.  As described in Note 1, we 
completed a Restructuring on March 9, 2010 converting $1,983.7 million of our then-existing Term 
Loan and the entire balance of our then-existing Mezzanine Loan to equity.   

Long-term debt at December 31, 2012 and 2011 consisted of the following: 

$250,000 Term Loan due May 21, 2018

 interest payable monthly

$2,668,690 Term Loan due June 12, 2014

$235,751 Revolving Loan due December 12, 2013

$300,000 10.5% Secured Notes due June 1, 2019,

 interest payable semiannually

Less:  Current portion of long-term debt

2012

2011

$       

248,125

$                  
-

-

-

-

248,125

2,500

2,475,837

235,751

300,000

3,011,588

43,500

Total long-term debt, net of discount

$       

245,625

$     

2,968,088

75 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Long-term debt repayments due (at face value) in each of the next five years and thereafter is as 
follows: 

Year

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

Thereafter

$           

2,500

2,500

2,500

2,500

2,500

235,625

$       

248,125

On May 26, 2011, we issued $300.0 million aggregate principal amount of our 10.5% Senior Notes, 
which matured on June 1, 2019.  The 10.5% Senior Notes accrued interest at 10.5% and interest 
was paid semi-annually on June 1 and December 1.  The 10.5% Senior Notes were pari passu to 
our existing Term Loan.  The proceeds from the 10.5% Senior Notes were used to provide for 
working capital needs and to repay borrowings under the accounts receivable securitization facility.  
We incurred approximately $8.2 million of professional fees to issue the 10.5% Senior Notes which 
were capitalized in accordance with the applicable accounting guidance for debt issuance costs, 
and were being amortized over the term of the debt.  

On May 22, 2012, we entered into a new $500.0 million DIP facility which was converted into an 
exit facility upon emergence from Chapter 11.  This exit facility consists of a $250.0 million revolving 
credit facility (“Revolving Credit Facility”), which is secured by the Company’s accounts receivable 
and inventory, and a $250.0 million term loan credit facility (“Term Loan”).  The Revolving Credit 
Facility has a term of five years and the interest rate is determined by a combination of LIBOR rate 
and average daily availability.  No funds have been drawn on the Revolving Credit Facility as of 
December 31, 2012.  The Term Loan has a term of six years and the interest rate is based on the 
LIBOR plus 6.0%.  The actual LIBOR is subject to a minimum “floor” of 1.25%.  As of December 31, 
2012, the interest rate of the Term Loan is 7.25%.  The proceeds of the Term Loan were used to 
fund the costs of the reorganization and provide post-closing working capital to the Company. 

On June 11, 2012 and June 20, 2012, respectively, we entered into Amendment No. 1 and 
Amendment No. 2 to the Term Loan.  Amendment No. 1 modified definitions by reducing LIBOR 
from 1.50% to 1.25% along with a reduction in the interest rate from 6.25% to 6.0%.  Amendment 
No. 2 related to administrative matters modifying the notice requirement, which enabled the 
Company to move from a DIP facility to an exit facility upon emergence from bankruptcy.    

On June 20, 2012, we entered into Amendment No. 1 and Amendment No. 2 to our Revolving 
Credit Facility.  Amendment No. 1 modified definitions relating to administrative matters releasing 
our restricted cash of $26.5 million, which was collateralizing our letters of credit.  Amendment No. 
2 modified certain provisions of the agreement with regard to same day borrowing.   

The $2.6 billion Term Loan and $235.8 million Revolving Loan were all issued with a discount 
equal to 4% of the borrowing commitment of each instrument.  As of December 31, 2011, the 
effective interest rates were 8.1% and 6.4% for the $2.6 billion Term Loan and $235.8 million 
Revolving Loan, respectively.  We have written off the remaining balance of deferred financing fees 
as of March 10, 2010 relating to the issuance of the $2.6 billion Term Loan, then-existing 
Mezzanine Loan and $235.8 million Revolving Loan.  The discounts were being amortized over the 
life of each debt arrangement as additional interest expense. 

76 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Loan Covenants 
We are required to meet certain restrictive financial covenants as defined under our Term Loan and 
Revolving Credit Facility.  We have financial covenants pertaining to interest coverage, maximum 
leverage, and fixed charge ratios.  The interest coverage ratios are set forth as follows:  7.0 to 1.0 
for fiscal quarters ending during 2012, 8.0 to 1.0 for fiscal quarters ending during 2013, and 9.0 to 
1.0 for fiscal quarters ending thereafter.  The maximum leverage ratios are set forth as follows:  
2.25 to 1.0 for fiscal quarters ending through September 30, 2013 and 2.0 to 1.0 for fiscal quarters 
ending December 31, 2013 and thereafter.  The fixed charge ratio, which only pertains to the 
revolving credit facility and is only tested in limited situations, is 1.0 to 1.0 through the end of the 
facility.  As of December 31, 2012, we were in compliance with all of our debt covenants.        

Receivables Funding Agreement 
On August 4, 2010, HM Receivables Co. II, LLC (“HMRC II”), a subsidiary of us, entered into a 
Receivables Funding and Administration Agreement (the “New Funding Agreement’), which 
established a $250.0 million revolving credit facility, with a maturity date of August 4, 2013.  The 
interest rate was LIBOR based.  All accounts receivables were held in a subsidiary of HMH, HMRC 
II, which had entered into the aforementioned New Funding Agreement and amendments thereto.  
Total HMRCII receivables on December 31, 2011 were $302.1 million.  As of December 31, 2011, 
$156.3 million of eligible receivables were pledged as collateral on the revolving credit facility, and 
the receivables have been sold by originating subsidiaries to HMRC II.  The assets of HMRC II 
were not available to satisfy the obligations of our other subsidiaries.  No LIBOR based rate was 
elected as of December 31, 2011 insofar as the HMRCII facility had no borrowings.  In connection 
with the 2012 Chapter 11 Reorganization, HMRC II was terminated. 

8. 

Interest Swap Arrangements  

We entered into interest rate swap agreements to manage our exposure to interest rate changes 
as required under our First Lien Credit Agreement which had required, prior to the March 9, 2010 
amendment, that at least 50% of the aggregate principal amount of our debt being effectively 
subject to a fixed or maximum interest.  The swaps effectively converted a portion of our variable 
rate debt to a fixed rate, without exchanging the notional principal amounts. 

We had entered into the following interest rate swap agreements with various financial institutions. 

Effective date of swap

3/30/2007

12/31/2007

Expiration

Date

Notional

Amount

Interest

Rates

3/31/2010

$         

814,370

4.999%–5.12%

12/31/2010

1,875,000

3.00%–4.715%

Our interest rate swaps were not designated as hedges and therefore did not qualify for hedge 
accounting under the accounting standards for derivative instruments and hedging activities.  Our 
interest rate swaps expired in 2010.  We had no other interest rate swaps outstanding as of 
December 31, 2012 and 2011.  We recorded an unrealized loss of $7.4 million for the period 
January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010, and a gain of $90.3 million for the period March 10, 2010 to 
December 31, 2010 in our statement of operations to account for the changes in fair value of the 
derivatives.  Interest rate swap arrangements expensed and recorded in interest expense for the 
period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 were $23.3 million and for the period March 10, 2010 to 
December 31, 2010 were $69.8 million.   

77 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

9. 

Severance and Other Charges 

2012 
During the year ended December 31, 2012, $19.2 million of severance payments were made to 
employees whose employment ended in 2012 and prior years and $7.6 million of net payments for 
office space no longer utilized by the Company.  Further, we recorded an expense in the amount of 
$9.4 million to reflect additional costs for severance and revised estimates for office space no 
longer utilized in connection to our continuing strategic alignment of the business. 

2011 
On November 8, 2011, our Board of Directors approved a restructuring plan that was substantially 
implemented in the fourth quarter of 2011.  The plan included workforce reductions of up to 
approximately 10% of the current workforce as part of an organizational realignment and a 
reduction of operating costs.  Accordingly, a severance charge of $28.8 million was recorded in 
2011 to reflect the workforce reductions due to our organizational realignment.  For the year ended 
December 31, 2011, $18.3 million of severance payments were made to employees whose 
employment ended in 2011 and prior years.   

In the year ended December 31, 2011, the vacant space accrual was increased $4.0 million 
primarily as a result of our exiting certain space.   Additionally, during 2011, we paid $9.9 million of 
payments for excess space where our committed payment obligations exceeded the sublease 
income received.  

2010 
We recorded a reduction in severance expense for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 
2010 of approximately $0.3 million in connection with revised cost estimates in relation to workforce 
reductions of employees.  These reductions were part of our continuing strategic integration of the 
former Houghton and Harcourt businesses.  During 2010, approximately $11.1 million of severance 
payments were made to employees whose employment ended in 2010 and prior years. 

As part of purchase accounting, we established a $48.0 million accrual for ongoing obligations to 
pay rent for vacant space that could not be sublet or space that is expected to be sublet at rates 
lower than the committed lease arrangements.  The length of these obligations varies by lease with 
the longest extending through 2019.  Subsequently, we sublet vacant space more quickly and at 
higher rates than previously estimated.  Accordingly, the reserve initially established was reduced 
by $11.5 million in the period ended December 31, 2010 to reflect the more recent positive sublet 
experience.   

A summary of the significant components of the severance/restructuring and other charges is as 
follows: 

78 

 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Successor Company

2012

Severance/

restructuring

accrual at

Severance/

restructuring

Severance/

restructuring

accrual at

December 31, 2011

expense

Cash payments 

December 31, 2012

Severance cos ts

$                                 

16,071

$               

5,284

$             

(19,213)

$                                

2,142

Other accruals  

19,679

4,091

(7,622)

16,148

$                                 

35,750

$               

9,375

$             

(26,835)

$                             

18,290

Successor Company

2011

Severance/

restructuring

accrual at

Severance/

restructuring

Severance/

restructuring

accrual at

December 31, 2010

expense

Cash payments 

December 31, 2011

Severance cos ts

$                                   

5,587

$            

28,801

$             

(18,317)

$                             

16,071

Other accruals  

25,593

4,000

(9,914)

19,679

$                                 

31,180

$            

32,801

$             

(28,231)

$                             

35,750

Successor Company

2010

Severance/

restructuring

accrual at

Severance/

restructuring

Severance/

restructuring

accrual at

March 10, 2010

expense

Cash payments 

December 31, 2010

Severance cos ts

$                                 

14,392

$                  

282

$               

(9,087)

$                                

5,587

Other accruals  

47,765

(11,525)

(10,647)

25,593

$                                 

62,157

$           

(11,243)

$             

(19,734)

$                             

31,180

Predecessor Company

2010

Severance/

restructuring

accrual at

Severance/

restructuring

Severance/

restructuring

accrual at

December 31, 2009

expense

Cash payments 

March 9, 2010

Severance cos ts

$                                 

16,414

$                        
-

$               

(2,022)

$                             

14,392

Other accruals  

50,000

-

(2,235)

47,765

$                                 

66,414

$                        
-

$               

(4,257)

$                             

62,157

79 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

10. 

Income Taxes 

The components of loss before taxes by jurisdiction are as follows: 

Successor

 Company

For the Year

For the Year

Ended

Ended

For the Period

March 10, 2010

Predecessor

 Company

For the Period

January 1, 2010 to

December 31, 2012

December 31, 2011

December 31, 2010

March 9, 2010

U.S.

Foreign

$                  

(47,755)

$             

(2,187,025)

$                 

(406,627)

$               

(292,665)

(45,327)

(95,498)

(89,171)

(19,331)

Loss before taxes

$                  

(93,082)

$             

(2,282,523)

$                 

(495,798)

$               

(311,996)

Total income taxes by jurisdiction are as follows: 

Successor

 Company

Predecessor

 Company

For the Year

For the Year

For the Period

For the Period

Ended

Ended

March 10, 2010

January 1, 2010 to

December 31, 2012 December 31, 2011

December 31, 2010

March 9, 2010

Income tax expense (benefit)

U.S.

Foreign

$                    

(7,045)

$                

(101,698)

$                   

18,477

$                       

499

1,102

1,545

(6,548)

(719)

$                     

(5,943)

$                 

(100,153)

$                    

11,929

$                       

(220)

Significant components of the expense (benefit) for income taxes attributable to loss from 
continuing operations consist of the following: 

Successor

 Company

Predecessor

 Company

For the Year

For the Year

For the Period

For the Period

Ended

Ended

March 10, 2010 to

January 1, 2010 to

December 31, 2012 December 31, 2011

December 31, 2010

March 9, 2010

Current

Foreign

U.S. - Federal

U.S. - State and other

Total current

Deferred

Foreign

U.S. - Federal

U.S. - State and other

Total deferred

$                      

1,102

$                     

3,958

$                             
-

$                           
-

-

3,031

4,133

-

(9,201)

(875)

(10,076)

-

13,506

17,464

(2,413)

(98,655)

(16,549)

(117,617)

(2,775)

4,207

1,432

(6,548)

15,465

1,580

10,497

-

499

499

(719)

-

-

(719)

Income tax expense (benefit)

$                     

(5,943)

$                 

(100,153)

$                    

11,929

$                      

(220)

80 

 
                    
                   
                    
                   
 
                       
                      
                      
                       
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

The reconciliation of the income tax rate computed at the statutory tax rate to the reported income 
tax expense (benefit) attributable to continuing operations is as follows: 

Successor

 Company

Predecessor

 Company

For the Year

For the Year

For the Period

For the Period

Ended

Ended

March 10, 2010 to

January 1, 2010 to

December 31, 2012

December 31, 2011

December 31, 2010

March 9, 2010

Statutory rate

Permanent items

Goodwill impairment

Transfer pricing adjustments

Reorganization expense

Bargain purchase gain

Foreign rate differential

State and local taxes

Alternative Minimum Tax Credit

Increase in valuation allowance

Effective tax rate

(35.0)%

3.7

 -      

(0.1)

5.9

(11.6)

10.3

0.0

 -      

20.4

(6.4)%

(35.0)%

0.1

12.0

 -      

 -      

 -      

1.0

(0.4)

 -      

17.9

(4.4)%

(35.0)%

0.1

 -      

 -      

 -      

 -      

2.4

(2.5)

(0.6)

38.0

2.4 %

(12.5)%

0.1

 -      

 -      

 -      

 -      

(21.8)

 -      

 -      

34.1

(0.1)%

The significant components of the net deferred tax assets and liabilities are shown in the following 
table: 

Tax asset related to

Net operating loss and other carryforwards

$                  

40,358

$                  

111,185

2012

2011

Returns reserve/inventory expense

Pension and postretirement benefits

Interest

Deferred revenue

Deferred compensation 

Other, net

Valuation allowance

Tax liability related to

Intangible assets

Depreciation and amortization expense

Other, net

74,523

19,968

537,624

105,714

13,601

18,927

(512,234)

298,481

(260,428)

(118,573)

(1,210)

(380,211)

86,235

26,291

507,741

130,803

30,392

17,943

(822,485)

88,105

(34,330)

(70,667)

(1,028)

(106,025)

Net deferred tax liabilities

$                 

(81,730)

$                   

(17,920)

The net deferred tax liability balance is stated at prevailing statutory income tax rates.  Deferred tax 
assets and liabilities are reflected on our consolidated balance sheets as follows: 

81 

 
                       
                     
                   
                   
                          
                        
                      
                      
                      
                         
                          
                       
                        
                        
                      
                   
                          
                       
                     
                     
                        
                      
                    
                    
                         
                       
                      
                     
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Current deferred tax assets

Noncurrent deferred tax liability

2012

2011

$                

42,858

$                

14,152

(124,588)

(32,072)

$               

(81,730)

$               

(17,920)

A reconciliation of the gross amount of unrecognized tax benefits, excluding accrued interest and 
penalties, is as follows: 

Predecessor Company

Balance at January 1, 2010

Additions based on tax positions related to the prior year

Additions based on tax positions related to the current year

Balance at March 9, 2010

Successor Company

Balance at March 10, 2010

Additions based on tax positions related to the prior year

Additions based on tax positions related to the current year

Reductions based on tax positions related to the prior year

Balance at December 31, 2010

Additions based on tax positions related to the prior year

Additions based on tax positions related to the current year

Balance at December 31, 2011

Reductions based on tax positions related to the prior year

Additions based on tax positions related to the current year

Balance at December 31, 2012

$       

64,655

-

-

$        

64,655

$        

64,655

-

-

(243)

$        

64,412

-

-

$        

64,412

(105)

-

$        

64,307

At December 31, 2012, we had $64.3 million of gross unrecognized tax benefits (excluding interest 
and penalties), of which $52.1 million, if recognized, would reduce the Company's effective tax 
rate.  We expect the amount of unrecognized tax benefit disclosed above not to change 
significantly over the next 12 months. 

With a few exceptions, we are currently open for audit under the statute of limitation for Federal, 
state and foreign jurisdictions for years 2009 to 2012.  However, carryforward attributes from prior 
years may still be adjusted upon examination by tax authorities if they are used in a future period. 

We report penalties and tax-related interest expense as a component of the provision for income 
taxes in the accompanying consolidated statement of operations.  At December 31, 2012 and 
2011, we had $5.9 million and $3.7 million, respectively, of accrued interest and penalties in the 
accompanying consolidated balance sheet.   

As part of the 2012 Chapter 11 Reorganization, we realized approximately $1.3 billion of 
cancellation of debt income.  We will be able to exclude this cancellation of debt income of $1.3 
billion from taxable income since HMH was insolvent (liabilities greater than the fair value of its 
assets) by this amount at the time of the exchange.  Although we will not have to pay current cash 
taxes from this transaction, we will need to reduce our tax attributes, such as net operating loss 
carryovers and tax credit carryovers and also reduce our tax basis of our assets to offset the $1.3 

82 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

billion of taxable income that did not have to be recognized due to insolvency.  As a result, our net 
operating losses and credit carryforwards will be reduced on January 1, 2013, and a portion of our 
tax basis in our assets will also be reduced at that time. 

As of December 31, 2012, we have approximately $390.7 million of Federal tax loss carryforwards, 
which will expire through 2032.  In addition, we have foreign tax credit carryforwards of $5.3 million, 
which will expire through 2022.  As noted above, these tax attributes will be reduced on January 1, 
2013 as a result of the 2012 Chapter 11 Reorganization.   

Based on the our assessment of historical pre-tax losses and the fact that we did not anticipate 
sufficient future taxable income in the near term to assure utilization of certain deferred tax assets, 
the Company recorded a valuation allowance at December 31, 2012 and 2011 of $512.2 million 
and $822.5 million, respectively.  We have decreased our valuation allowance by $310.3 million in 
2012, and increased our valuation allowance by $388.0 million, and $317.9 million, respectively, for 
2011 and 2010. 

11.  Retirement and Postretirement Benefit Plans 

Retirement Plan 
We have a noncontributory, qualified defined benefit pension plan (the "Retirement Plan"), which 
covers certain employees.  The Retirement Plan is a cash balance plan, which accrues benefits 
based on pay, length of service, and interest.  The funding policy is to contribute amounts subject 
to minimum funding standards set forth by the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 
and the Internal Revenue Code.  The Retirement Plan's assets consist principally of common 
stocks, fixed income securities, investments in registered investment companies, and cash and 
cash equivalents.  We also have a nonqualified defined benefit plan, or nonqualified plan, that 
covers employees who earn over the qualified pay limit as determined by the Internal Revenue 
Service.  The nonqualified plan accrues benefits for the executive officers based on service and 
pay.  Benefits for all other employees accrue based on the cash balance plan calculation.  The 
nonqualified plan is not funded.  We use a December 31 date to measure the pension and 
postretirement liabilities.  In 2007, both the qualified and nonqualified pension plans eliminated 
participation in the plans for new employees hired after October 31, 2007. 

We also had a foreign defined benefit plan.  On July 20, 2011, we entered into a bulk annuity policy 
with a third party which effectively terminated the foreign defined benefit plan.  This policy covers 
all known plan beneficiaries and liabilities and represents a full transfer of the plan’s financial and 
longevity risk to the third party.  The policy is held in the name of the plan trustees.  This 
termination did not constitute a settlement of liability under applicable accounting guidance for 
pension plans.  Following a full plan data cleansing, the bulk annuity policy is expected to be 
converted into individual annuity policies at which point the plan will be discharged of all future 
liability with respect to the plan beneficiaries.  We anticipate the conversion to individual annuity 
policies along with the liability discharge to occur in the first half of 2013.  The foreign defined 
benefit plan had benefit obligations of $16.4 million and $14.3 million as of December 31, 2012 and 
2011, respectively.  The plan had assets of $16.6 million and $14.6 million December 31, 2012 and 
2011, respectively.  Further, the plan had a net pension benefit asset of $0.2 million and $0.2 
million, at December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.  The foreign defined benefit plan is included 
in the accompanying table for all years presented.   

During 2012, we amended the postretirement medical benefits plan resulting in the benefit 
contributions for certain participants to remain at the current year level for all future years.  The 
result of the plan change was to reduce our accrued postretirement benefits liability by 
approximately $8.7 million with the offset to other comprehensive income in accordance with the 
accounting guidance for other postretirement defined benefit plans.   

83 

 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

We are required to recognize the funded status of defined benefit pension and other postretirement 
plans as an asset or liability in the balance sheet and are required to recognize actuarial gains and 
losses and prior service costs and credits in other comprehensive income and subsequently 
amortize those items in the statement of operations.  Further, we are required to use a 
measurement date equal to the fiscal year end. 

The following table summarizes the Accumulated Benefit Obligations ("ABO"), the change in 
Projected Benefit Obligation ("PBO"), and the funded status of our plans as of and for the financial 
statement period ended December 31, 2012 and 2011: 

ABO at end of period

Change in PBO

PBO at beginning of period

Service cost

Interest cost on PBO

Actuarial (gain) loss

Benefits paid

Exchange rates

2012

2011

$         

204,420

$         

196,898

$         

196,898

$         

186,169

-

8,288

8,860

(10,136)

510

-

9,120

10,497

(9,045)

157

PBO at end of period

$         

204,420

$         

196,898

Change in plan assets

Fair market value at beginning of period

$         

132,408

$         

126,196

Actual return (loss)

Company contribution

Benefits paid

Exchange rates

15,669

17,168

(10,136)

597

3,628

11,460

(9,045)

169

Fair market value at end of period

$         

155,706

$         

132,408

Funded status

$          

(48,714)

$          

(64,490)

Amounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets at December 31, 2012 and 2011 consist 
of: 

2012

2011

Noncurrent liabilities

$          

(48,714)

$          

(64,490)

Additional year-end information for pension plans with ABO in excess of plan assets at 
December 31, 2012 and 2011 consist of: 

PBO

ABO

Fair value of plan assets

2012

2011

$         

187,998

$         

182,549

187,998

138,987

182,549

117,843

84 

 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Amounts not yet reflected in net periodic benefit cost and recognized in accumulated other 
comprehensive income at December 31, 2012 and 2011 consist of: 

2012

2011

Net gain (loss)

$            

(2,204)

$          

(14,954)

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

$            

(2,204)

$          

(14,954)

Weighted average assumptions used to determine the benefit obligations (both PBO and ABO) at 
December 31, 2012 and 2011 are: 

Discount rate

Increase in future compensation

Net periodic pension cost includes the following components: 

2012

3.8%

N/A

2011

4.4%

N/A

For the Year 

For the Year 

For the Period

For the Period 

Sucessor Company

Predecessor Company

Ended December Ended December March 10, 2010 to
31, 2011

 December 31, 2010

31, 2012

January 1, 2010 to

March 9, 2010

Service cost

$                            
-

$                     
-

$                           
-

$                               
-

Interest cost on projected benefit obligation

Expected return on plan assets

Amortization of net (gain) loss

Net pension expense

Loss (gain) due to settlement

8,288

(9,047)

13

(746)

84

9,120

(8,175)

-

945

20

7,816

(5,443)

-

2,373

-

1,580

(1,318)

2

264

-

Net cost (gain) recognized for the period

$                       

(662)

$                 

965

$                    

2,373

$                           

264

Significant actuarial assumptions used to determine net periodic pension cost at December 31, 
2012, 2011 and 2010 are: 

2012

2011

2010

Discount rate

Increase in future compensation

Expected long-term rate of return on assets

4.4 %

N/A

6.7 %

5.1 %

N/A

6.7 %

5.6 %

N/A

7.0 %

Assumptions on Expected Long-Term Rate of Return as Investment Strategies 
We employ a building block approach in determining the long-term rate of return for plan assets.  
Historical markets are studied and long-term relationships between equities and fixed income are 
preserved congruent with the widely accepted capital market principle that assets with higher 
volatility generate a greater return over the long run.  Current market factors such as inflation and 

85 

 
 
 
         
        
       
         
        
       
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

interest rates are evaluated before long-term capital market assumptions are determined.  The 
long-term portfolio return is established via a building block approach and proper consideration of 
diversification and rebalancing.  Peer data and historical returns are reviewed for reasonability and 
appropriateness.  We regularly review the actual asset allocation and periodically rebalances 
investments to a targeted allocation when appropriate.  The current targeted asset allocation is 
50% with equity managers and 50% with fixed income managers.  For 2013, we will use a 7.0% 
long-term rate of return for the Retirement Plan.  We will continue to evaluate the expected rate of 
return assumption, at least annually, and will adjust as necessary. 

Plan Assets 
Plan assets for the U.S. tax qualified plans consist of a diversified portfolio of fixed income 
securities, equity securities, real estate, and cash equivalents.  Plan assets do not include any of 
our securities.  The U.S. pension plan assets are invested in a variety of funds within a Collective 
Trust (“Trust”).  The Trust is a group trust designed to permit qualified trusts to comingle their 
assets for investment purposes on tax-exempt basis.  The U.K pension plan assets are invested in 
a single bulk annuity policy with a third party. 

Investment Policy and Investment Targets 
The tax qualified plans consist of the U.S. pension plan and the U.K. pension scheme.  It is our 
practice to fund amounts for our qualified pension plans at least sufficient to meet minimum 
requirements of local benefit and tax laws.  The investment objectives of our pension plan asset 
investments is to provide long-term total growth and return, which includes capital appreciation and 
current income.  The nonqualified noncontributory defined benefit pension plan is generally not 
funded.  Assets were invested among several asset classes. 

The percentage of assets invested in each asset class at December 31, 2012 and 2011 is shown 
below. 

2012

Asset Class

Equity

Fixed income

Real estate investment trust

Annuity policies

Other

2011

Asset Class

Equity

Fixed income

Annuity policies

Other

Percentage

in Each

Asset Class

40.7 %

41.0

4.1

10.6

3.6

100.0 %

Percentage

in Each

Asset Class

44.0 %

43.0

10.8

2.2

100.0 %

86 

 
 
             
             
               
             
               
           
             
             
             
               
           
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Fair Value Measurements 
The fair value of our pension plan assets by asset category and by level at December 31 were as 
follows: 

Quoted Prices

Significant

For the 

in Active

Other

Year ended

Markets for

Observable

December 31,

Identical Assets

Inputs

2012

(Level 1)

(Level 2)

Cash and cash equivalents

$             

1,123

$             

1,123

$                    
-

Equity securities

U.S. large cap growth

U.S. large cap value

U.S. large cap passive

U.S. small / mid cap growth

U.S. small / mid cap value

Non-U.S. equities

Government bonds

Corporate bonds

Mortgage-backed securities 

Asset-backed securities

Commercial Mortgage-Backed Securities

Real Estate

Annuity policies

Other

5,096

5,152

17,442

4,328

4,325

27,006

19,877

34,567

8,551

506

425

6,355

16,423

4,530

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

5,096

5,152

17,442

4,328

4,325

27,006

19,877

34,567

8,551

506

425

6,355

16,423

4,530

$         

155,706

$             

1,123

$         

154,583

Quoted Prices

Significant

For the 

in Active

Other

Year ended

Markets for

Observable

December 31,

Identical Assets

Inputs

2011

(Level 1)

(Level 2)

Cash and cash equivalents

$             

1,005

$             

1,005

$                    
-

Equity securities

U.S. large cap growth

U.S. large cap value

U.S. large cap passive

U.S. small / mid cap growth

U.S. small / mid cap value

Non-U.S. equities

Government bonds

Corporate bonds

Mortgage-backed securities 

Asset-backed securities

Commercial Mortgage-Backed Securities

Annuity policies

Other

8,944

9,333

13,034

3,877

3,983

19,102

17,535

29,249

9,239

472

424

14,349

1,862

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

8,944

9,333

13,034

3,877

3,983

19,102

17,535

29,249

9,239

472

424

14,349

1,862

$         

132,408

$             

1,005

$         

131,403

87 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

We recognize that risk and volatility are present to some degree with all types of investments.  
However, high levels of risk are minimized through diversification by asset class, by style of each 
fund. 

Estimated Future Benefit Payments 
The following benefit payments are expected to be paid. 

Fiscal Year Ended

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018–2021

Total

Pension

13,530

19,526

18,944

19,819

10,514

50,238

Expected Contributions 
We expect to contribute approximately $11.2 million in 2013; however, the actual funding decision 
will be made after the 2013 valuation is completed. 

Postretirement Benefit Plan 
We also provide postretirement medical benefits to retired full-time, nonunion employees hired 
before April 1, 1992, who have provided a minimum of five years of service and attained age 55. 

88 

 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

The following table summarizes the Accumulated Postretirement Benefit Obligation ("APBO"), the 
changes in plan assets, and the funded status of our plan as of and for the financial statement 
periods ended December 31, 2012 and 2011. 

Change in APBO

APBO at beginning of period

Service cost (benefits earned during the period)

Interest cost on APBO

Plan Amendments

Employee contributions

Actuarial (gain) loss

Benefits paid

2012

2011

$           

35,970

$           

36,546

250

1,087

(8,674)

646

3,042

(2,748)

372

1,840

-

716

(540)

(2,964)

APBO at end of period

$           

29,573

$           

35,970

Change in plan assets
Fair market value at beginning of period

Company contributions

Employee contributions

Benefits paid

$                    
-

$                    
-

2,102

646

(2,748)

2,248

716

(2,964)

Fair market value at end of period

$                    
-

$                    
-

Funded status

$           

29,573

$           

35,970

Amounts for postretirement benefits accrued in the consolidated balance sheets at December 31, 
2012 and 2011 consist of: 

Current liabilities

Noncurrent liabilities

2012

2011

$            

(2,342)

$            

(2,252)

(27,231)

(33,718)

Net amount recognized

$          

(29,573)

$          

(35,970)

Amounts not yet reflected in net periodic benefit cost and recognized in accumulated other 
comprehensive income at December 31, 2012 and 2011 consist of: 

Net gain (loss)

Prior service cost

2012

2011

$            

(5,298)

$            

(2,256)

7,638

-

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

$             

2,340

$            

(2,256)

89 

 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Weighted average actuarial assumptions used to determine APBO at year-end December 31, 2012 
and 2011 are: 

2012

2011

Discount rate

Health care cost trend rate assumed for next year

Rate to which the cost trend rate is assumed to decline 

 (ultimate trend rate)

Year that the rate reaches the ultimate trend rate

3.8 %

7.4 %

4.5 %

2027

4.5 %

7.6 %

4.5 %

2027

Net periodic postretirement benefit cost included the following components: 

Successor Company

Predecessor 
Company

For the Period

For the Period

For the 

For the 

Year Ended

Year Ended

March 10,

2010 to

December 31,

December 31,

December 31,

2012

2011

2010

 January 1,

2010 to

March 9,

2010

Service cost

Interest cost on APBO

Amortization of unrecognized prior service cost

Amortization of net (gain) loss

$                   

250

$                   

372

$               

300

$                     

57

1,269

(1,035)

-

1,840

1,583

-

-

-

-

319

(15)

(226)

Net periodic postretirement benefit expense

$                   

484

$                

2,212

$             

1,883

$                   

135

Significant actuarial assumptions used to determine postretirement benefit cost at December 31, 
2012, 2011 and 2010 are: 

2012

2011

2010

Discount rate

Health care cost trend rate assumed for next year

Rate to which the cost trend rate is assumed to decline 

 (ultimate trend rate)

Year that the rate reaches the ultimate trend rate

4.5 %

7.6%

4.5%

2027

5.2 %

7.8%

4.5%

2027

5.8 %

8.1%

4.5%

2027

Assumed health care trend rates have a significant effect on the amounts reported for the health 
care plans.  A one-percentage-point change in assumed health care cost trend rates would have 
the following effects on the expense recorded in 2012 and 2011 for the postretirement medical 
plan: 

90 

 
               
               
               
               
               
               
 
 
       
      
      
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

2012

2011

One-percentage-point increase

Effect on total of service and interest cost components

$                 

23

$                 

47

Effect on postretirement benefit obligation

One-percentage-point decrease

Effect on total of service and interest cost components

Effect on postretirement benefit obligation

303

(25)

(276)

1,076

(55)

(1,278)

The following table presents the change in other comprehensive income, net of tax expense of $85, 
for the year ended December 31, 2012 related to our pension and postretirement obligations. 

Postretirement

Pension

Plans

Benefit

Plan

Total

Sources of change in accumulated other 

 comprehensive income (loss)

New prior service cost

Net loss (gain) arising during the period

Amortization of prior service credit

Total accumulated other comprehensive 

$                    
-

$             

8,588

$             

8,588

(2,129)

-

(3,045)

(1,036)

(5,174)

(1,036)

 Income (loss) recognized during the period

$            

(2,129)

$             

4,507

$             

2,378

Estimated amounts that will be amortized from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) 
over the next fiscal year. 

Prior service credit (cost)

Net gain (loss)

Total

Total

Pension

Postretirement

Plans

Plan

$                    
-

$             

1,381

(337)

(309)

$              

(337)

$             

1,072

91 

 
 
                    
            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Estimated Future Benefit Payments 

The following benefit payments, which reflect expected future service, are expected to be paid: 

Fiscal Year Ended

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018-2022

Expected Contribution 

Postretirement

Plan

$             

2,342

2,274

2,193

2,107

2,057

9,445

We expect to contribute approximately $2.3 million in 2013. 

Defined Contribution Retirement Plan 
We maintain a defined contribution retirement plan, the Houghton Mifflin 401(k) Savings Plan, 
which conforms to Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code, and covers substantially all of our 
eligible employees.  Participants may elect to contribute up to 50.0% of their compensation subject 
to an annual limit.  We provided a matching contribution in amounts up to 4.5% of employee 
compensation until March 1, 2009 when the employer contribution was suspended.  The 
contribution was reinstated on July 1, 2010, where we provided a matching contribution in amounts 
up to 1.5% of employee compensation and further increased to 3.0% of employee contribution 
effective May 2011.  The 401(k) contribution expense amounted to $4.9 million and $4.0 million for 
the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.   For the period March 10, 2010 
through December 31, 2010 the contribution expense was $1.0 million.  We did not make any 
discretionary contribution in 2012, 2011 and 2010. 

12.  Share-Based Compensation 

Certain employees participate or participated in various equity plans of the Predecessor and 
Successor Company which provide for the grant of stock options and restricted stock to certain 
executive employees and independent members of the Board of Directors.  The stock underlying 
such plans for the Predecessor Company was held in trust for the equity recipients.  The stock 
related to award forfeitures remains outstanding and may be reallocated to new recipients.  After 
the date of the March 2010 Restructuring, the equity awards pertaining to the Predecessor 
Company were no longer charged to our financial results as the employees were no longer related 
to the Predecessor Company.   

The vesting terms for equity awards generally range from 1 to 4 years over equal annual 
installments and generally expire seven years after the date of grant.  Restricted stock is common 
stock that is subject to a risk of forfeiture only upon voluntary termination or termination for cause, 
as defined.  Total compensation expense related to stock option grants and restricted stock 
issuances recorded in the year ended December 31, 2012 was approximately $6.3 million of which 
approximately $4.3 million was recorded in selling and administrative expense and approximately 
$2.0 million was recorded in reorganization items, net.  Total compensation expense related to 
stock option grants and restricted stock issuances recorded in the year ended December 31, 2011, 
for the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010, and for the period March 10, 2010 to December 

92 

 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

31, 2010 was approximately $8.6 million, $0.9 million, and $4.3 million, respectively, and was 
recorded in selling and administrative expense.   

Stock Options 
The following tables summarize option activity for HMH employees in stock options for the periods 
ended December 31, 2012 and 2011: 

Successor Company

Number of

Shares

Weighted

Average

Exercise

Price

Balance at December 31, 2010

26,976,957

$              

9.54

Granted

Forfeited

Cancelled

468,224

(14,522,175)

(9,213,225)

5.37

8.58

8.67

Balance at December 31, 2011

3,709,781

$              

5.90

Granted

Forfeited

Cancelled

Balance at December 31, 2012

Options Exercisable at end of year 

4,912,281

(749,159)

(2,960,622)

25.00

5.37

6.03

4,912,281

$             

25.00

460,526

$             

25.00

The intrinsic value of a stock option is the amount by which the current market value of the 
underlying stock exceeds the exercise price of the option as of the balance sheet date.  There was 
no intrinsic value of options outstanding and exercisable at December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010. 

We estimate the fair value of stock options using the Black-Scholes valuation model.  Key input 
assumptions used to estimate the fair value of stock options include the exercise price of the 
award, the expected volatility of our stock over the option's expected term, the risk-free interest rate 
over the option's expected term, and our expected annual dividend yield. 

The fair value of each option granted was estimated on the grant date using the Black-Scholes 
valuation model with the following assumptions: 

Successor Company

For the 

For the 

For the Period

Year Ended

Year Ended

March 10 2010 to

December 31,

December 31,

December 31,

2012

2011

2010

Expected term (years) (a)

Expected dividend yield 
Expected volatility (b)
Risk-free interest rate (c)

4.0

0.00%

24.21%-26.54%

0.67%-0.76%

7.0

0.00%

7.0

0.00%

25.88% 22.68%-24.12%

2.40%

1.77%-3.11%

93 

 
 
                      
                     
                 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

(a)  The expected term is the number of years that we estimate that options will be outstanding 

prior to exercise. 

(b)  We have estimated volatility for options granted based on the historical volatility for a group of 
companies believed to be a representative peer group, selected based on industry and 
market capitalization. 

(c)  The risk-free interest rate is based on the U.S. Treasury yield for a period commensurate with 

the expected life of the option. 

The accounting standard for stock-based compensation requires companies to estimate forfeitures 
at the time of grant and periodically revise those estimates in subsequent periods if actual 
forfeitures differ from those estimates.  Stock-based compensation expense is recorded only for 
those awards expected to vest using an estimated forfeiture rate based on historical forfeiture data 
coupled with and estimated derived forfeiture rate of peers.  

As of December 31, 2012, there remained approximately $16.0 million of unearned compensation 
expense related to unvested stock options to be recognized over a weighted average term of 3.5 
years. 

The weighted average grant date fair value was $25.00, $4.54 and $7.01 for options granted in 
2012, 2011 and 2010 (Successor Period), respectively. 

The following tables summarize information about stock options outstanding and exercisable under 
the plan at December 31, 2012: 

Successor Company

Options Outstanding

Options

Weighted 

Options Exercisable 

Options

Range of

Outstanding at

Average

Weighted 

Exercisable at 

Weighted

Exercise

December 31,

Remaining

Average

December 31,

Average

Price

2012

Contractual life Exercise Price

2012

Exercise Price

$             

25.00

4,912,281

4,912,281

3.5

3.5

$             

25.00

$             

25.00

460,526

$             

25.00

460,526

$             

25.00

Restricted Stock (Successor Company) 
The following table summarizes restricted stock activity for grants to HMH employees and directors 
in our restricted stock units from March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2012: 

94 

 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Numbers of

Units

Weighted

Average

Grant Date

Fair Value

-

$            
-

138,354

4.54

-

-

-

-

Balance at December 31, 2010

Granted

Vested

Forfeited

Balance at December 31, 2011

138,354

$      

4.54

Granted

Vested

Cancelled

22,200

-

(138,354)

25.00

-

4.54

Balance at December 31, 2012

22,200

$     

25.00

13.  Fair Value Measurements 

The accounting standard for fair value measurements among other things, defines fair value, 
establishes a consistent framework for measuring fair value and expands disclosure for each major 
asset and liability category measured at fair value on either a recurring or nonrecurring basis.  The 
accounting standard establishes a three-tier fair value hierarchy which prioritizes the inputs used in 
measuring fair value as follows: 

Level 1 

Level 2 

Level 3 

Observable input such as quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or 
liabilities; 

Observable inputs, other than the quoted prices in active markets, that are observable 
either directly or indirectly; and 

Unobservable inputs in which there is little or no market data, which require the 
reporting entity to develop its own assumptions. 

Assets and liabilities measured at fair value are based on one or more of three valuation 
techniques identified in the tables below.  Where more than one technique is noted, individual 
assets or liabilities were valued using one or more of the noted techniques.  The valuation 
techniques are as follows: 

(a)  Market approach: Prices and other relevant information generated by market transactions 

involving identical or comparable assets or liabilities; 

(b) 

(c) 

Cost approach: Amount that would be currently required to replace the service capacity of an 
asset (current replacement cost); and 

Income approach: Valuation techniques to convert future amounts to a single present amount 
based on market expectations (including present value techniques). 

On a recurring basis, we measure certain financial assets and liabilities at fair value, including our 
money market funds, short-term investments which consist of U.S. treasury securities and U.S. 
agency securities, and foreign exchange forward contracts.  The accounting standard for fair value 
measurements defines fair value as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to 

95 

 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.  
As such, fair value is a market-based measurement that should be determined based on 
assumptions that market participants would use in pricing an asset or liability.  In determining fair 
value, we utilize valuation techniques that maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the 
use of unobservable inputs to the extent possible as well as consider counterparty and its credit 
risk in its assessment of fair value. 

The following tables present our financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring 
basis at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011: 

Quoted Prices

Significant

in Active

Other

Successor

Markets for

Observable

Company

Identical Assets

Inputs

2012

(Level 1)

(Level 2)

Valuation

Technique

Financial assets

Money market funds

U.S. treasury securities

U.S. agency securities

Foreign exchange forward contracts

$        

299,918

$        

299,918

$                   
-

97,134

48,907

475

97,134

-

-

-

48,907

475

$         

446,434

$         

397,052

$           

49,382

(a)

(a)

(a)

(a)

Quoted Prices

Significant

in Active

Other

Successor

Markets for

Observable

Company

Identical Assets

Inputs

2011

(Level 1)

(Level 2)

Valuation

Technique

$         

368,701

$         

368,701

$                    
-

(a)

$         

368,701

$         

368,701

$                    
-

Financial assets

Money market funds

Financial liabilities

Foreign exchange forward contracts

$             

1,113

$                    
-

$             

1,113

(a)

$             

1,113

$                    
-

$             

1,113

Our money market funds and U.S. treasury securities are classified within Level 1 of the fair value 
hierarchy because they are valued using quoted prices in active markets for identical instruments.  
Our U.S. agency securities are classified within level 2 of the fair value hierarchy because they are 
valued using other than quoted prices in active markets.  In addition to $299.9 million and $368.7 
million invested in money market funds as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011, 
respectively, we had $29.2 million and $44.9 million of cash invested in bank accounts as of 
December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011, respectively. 

Our foreign exchange forward contracts consist of Euro forward contracts and are classified within 
Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy because they are valued based on observable inputs and are 
available for substantially the full term of our derivative instruments. 

96 

 
            
                
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

The following table presents our nonfinancial assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a 
nonrecurring basis during 2012 and 2011:   

Significant

Successor

Unobservable

Company

Inputs

Total

Valuation

2012

(Level 3)

Impairment

Technique

Nonfinancial assets

Property, plant, and equipment

$                    
-

$                    
-

$             

2,590

Pre-publication costs

Other intangible assets

7,160

-

7,160

-

413

5,000

$             

7,160

$             

7,160

$             

8,003

(b)

(b)

(a) (c)

Nonfinancial liabilities

Other accruals

$           

16,148

$           

16,148

$                    
-

(c)

$           

16,148

$           

16,148

$                    
-

Significant

Successor

Unobservable

Company

Inputs

Total

Valuation

2011

(Level 3)

Impairment

Technique

Nonfinancial assets

Property, plant, and equipment

$                    
-

$                    
-

$             

5,640

320

520,088

373,030

320

520,088

373,030

33,424

1,442,500

192,600

$         

893,438

$         

893,438

$      

1,674,164

(b)

(b)

(a) (c)

(a) (c)

Pre-publication costs

Goodwill

Other intangible assets

Nonfinancial liabilities

Other accruals

$           

19,679

$           

19,679

$                    
-

(c)

$           

19,679

$           

19,679

$                    
-

Our nonfinancial assets, which include goodwill, other intangible assets, property, plant, and 
equipment, and pre-publication costs, are not required to be measured at fair value on a recurring 
basis.  However, if certain trigger events occur, or if an annual impairment test is required, we 
evaluate the nonfinancial assets for impairment.  If an impairment did occur, the asset is required to 
be recorded at the estimated fair value.   

We review internal and external software development costs, included within property, plant, and 
equipment, for impairment.  The carrying amounts of software development costs are periodically 
compared to net realizable value and impairment charges are recorded, as appropriate, when 
amounts expected to be realized are lower.  For the year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, 
software development costs of $2.6 million and $5.6 million, respectively, were impaired as the 
products will not be sold in the marketplace. 

Pre-publication costs recorded on the balance sheet are periodically reviewed for impairment by 
comparing the unamortized capitalized costs of the assets to the fair value of those assets.  For the 
years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, pre-publication costs of $0.4 million and $33.4 million, 
respectively, were impaired as the programs will not be sold in the marketplace.   

97 

 
                
            
          
          
       
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

In evaluating goodwill for impairment, we first compare our reporting unit's fair value to its carrying 
value.  We estimate the fair values of our reporting units by considering market multiple and recent 
transaction values of peer companies, where available, and projected discounted cash flows, if 
reasonably estimable.  There was no impairment recorded for goodwill for the year ended 
December 31, 2012.  Impairment recorded for goodwill for the year ended December 31, 2011 was 
$1,442.5 million.  There was no impairment recorded for the periods January 1, 2010 to March 9, 
2010, and March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010. 

We perform an impairment test for our other intangible assets by comparing the assets fair value to 
its carrying value.  Fair value is estimated based on recent market transactions, where available, 
and projected discounted cash flows, if reasonably estimable.  There was a $5.0 million impairment 
recorded for the year ended December 31, 2012 relating to one specific tradename intangible asset 
that was fully impaired.  Certain tradename intangible assets and other intangible assets were 
written down to their fair value of $373.0 million resulting in an impairment charge of $192.6 million 
which was included in earnings for the year ended December 31, 2011.  There was no impairment 
recorded for the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010.  Impairment charges were $87.0 million 
for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010.  The fair value of goodwill and other 
intangible assets are estimates, which are inherently subject to significant uncertainties, and actual 
results could vary significantly from these estimates. 

Other accruals include restructuring charges which were valued using our internal estimates using 
a discounted cash flow model, and we have classified the other accruals as Level 3 in the fair value 
hierarchy. 

Fair Value of Debt 
The following table presents the carrying amounts and estimated fair market values of our debt at 
December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011.  The fair value of debt is deemed to be the amount at 
which the instrument could be exchanged in an orderly transaction between market participants at 
the measurement date. 

Successor Company
December 31, 2012

Successor Company
December 31, 2011

Carrying
Amount

Estimated
Fair Value

Carrying
Amount

Estimated
Fair Value

Debt
$250,000 Term loan
$2,668,690 Term loan
Revolving loan
10.5% notes

$         

248,125
-
-
-

$         

249,986
-
-
-

-
$                    
2,581,690
235,751
300,000

$                    
-
1,484,472
135,557
189,000

The fair market values of our debt were estimated based on quoted market prices on a private 
exchange for those instruments that are traded and are classified as level 2 within the fair value 
hierarchy, at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011.  The fair market values require varying 
degrees of management judgment.  The factors used to estimate these values may not be valid on 
any subsequent date.  Accordingly, the fair market values of the debt presented may not be 
indicative of their future values. 

98 

 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

14.  Commitments and Contingencies 

Lease Obligations 
We have operating leases for various real property, office facilities, and warehouse equipment that 
expire at various dates through 2019.  Certain leases contain renewal and escalation clauses for a 
proportionate share of operating expenses. 

The future minimum rental commitments under all noncancelable leases (with initial or remaining 
lease terms in excess of one year) for real estate and equipment are payable as follows: 

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

Thereafter

Operating

Leases

$           

43,818

41,434

41,208

33,441

14,947

18,082

Total minimum lease payments

Total future minimal rentals under subleases

$         

192,930

$           

41,905

For the year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 rent expense, net of sublease income, was 
$38.0 million and $39.3 million, respectively.  The rent expense, net of sublease income, for the 
period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010 was $6.3 million and for the period March 10, 2010 to 
December 31, 2010 was $18.4 million.  On March 10, 2010, in connection with purchase 
accounting, the accrual estimate was revised and the estimate was adjusted to fair value.  In the 
period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010, the accrual for the vacant space was reduced by 
$11.5 million; thus, lowering rent expense, to reflect the subleasing of space sooner and at higher 
rates than originally assumed.  For the year ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, the rent expense 
included a $4.1 million and $3.5 million charge as additional real estate was vacated.  

Purchase Commitments 
During 2008, we entered into a print services agreement with a third party for a term of five years 
commencing January 1, 2009 whereby the third party will provide platemaking, printing, binding 
and disposition services for the Company.  The agreement expands the previous relationship 
between the two companies.  We are obligated to purchase $175.0 million per contract year for a 
total of $875.0 million over the five-year term.  Effective January 1, 2012, the print service 
agreement was amended to extend the agreement for two years and modify some of the aggregate 
spend and savings covenants.  As of December 31, 2012, our remaining purchase commitment 
was approximately $171.0 million. 

Contingencies 
We are involved in ordinary and routine litigation and matters incidental to our business. Litigation 
alleging infringement of copyrights and other intellectual property rights has become extensive in 
the educational publishing industry.  Specifically, there have been various settled, pending and 
threatened litigation that allege we exceeded the print run limitation or other restrictions in licenses 
granted to us to reproduce photographs in our textbooks.  While management believes that there is 
a reasonable possibility we may incur a loss associated with the pending and threatened litigation, 
we are not able to estimate such amount, but we do not expect any of these matters to have a 
material adverse effect on our results of operations, financial position or cash flows.  We have 

99 

 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

insurance over such amounts and with coverage and deductibles as management believes is 
reasonable. There can be no assurance that our liability insurance will cover all events or that the 
limits of coverage will be sufficient to fully cover all liabilities. We were contingently liable for $11.7 
million and $11.6 million of performance related surety bonds for our operating activities as of 
December 31, 2012 and 2011, respectively.  An aggregate of $26.2 million of letters of credit 
existed each year at December 31, 2012 and 2011 of which $6.4 million backed the 
aforementioned performance related surety bonds each year in 2012 and 2011. 

We routinely enter into standard indemnification provisions as part of license agreements involving 
use of our intellectual property.  These provisions typically require us to indemnify and hold 
harmless licensees in connection with any infringement claim by a third party relating to the 
intellectual property covered by the license agreement.  The assessment business routinely enters 
into contracts with customers that contain provisions requiring us to indemnify the customer against 
a broad array of potential liabilities resulting from any breach of the contract or the invalidity of the 
test.  Although the term of these provisions and the maximum potential amounts of future payments 
we could be required to make is not limited, we have never incurred any costs to defend or settle 
claims related to these types of indemnification provisions.  We therefore believe the estimated fair 
value of these provisions is inconsequential, and have no liabilities recorded for them as of 
December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011. 

15.  Related Party Transactions 

 Debt-for-Equity Exchange 
As discussed in Note 2, upon the Company’s emergence from Chapter 11 bankruptcy proceedings, 
holders of the Term Loan, Revolving Loan, and 10.5% Senior Notes were issued post-emergence 
shares of new common stock pursuant to the final Plan on a pro rata basis.  Certain of these 
holders of the Term Loan, Revolving Loan, and 10.5% Senior Notes were also equity holders prior 
to the consummation of the Plan.  The amount of the gain attributable to the debt to equity 
conversion, net of elimination of fees and other charges, of $1,010.3 million, which is associated to 
the holders of the Term Loan, Revolving Loan, and 10.5% Senior Notes that were also equity 
holders prior to the consummation of the Plan, was charged to capital in excess of par value. 

Transactions with Former Officer: 

Officer Loan 
On March 9, 2010, we entered into a credit agreement with an entity controlled by an 
executive of the Company at that time, whereby the entity was granted a loan in the 
aggregate principal amount of $20.0 million for the sole purpose of satisfying certain 
obligations of that officer with regards to the acquisition of equity of the Predecessor 
Company.  The loan bore interest at a rate per annum equal to 2.69% and had a maturity 
date of March 9, 2015. 

On November 16, 2010, we entered into an amended and restated credit agreement 
whereby the loan of $20.0 million was divided into a tranche A loan with an aggregate 
principal amount of $12.2 million and a tranche B loan with an aggregate principal amount of 
$7.8 million.  Both tranches of the loan continued to bear interest at a rate per annum equal 
to 2.69%.  The tranche A loan had a maturity date of March 9, 2015 and the tranche B loan 
has a maturity date of September 30, 2030.  There are no required principal or interest 
payments during the term of the loan with the interest accruing to the outstanding balance.  
While the officer was employed by the Company, the loan entity earned a fee equal to 
approximately $0.1 million per month (“Earned Fee”) that was used to repay the amount 
outstanding under the loan.  The Earned Fee was approximately $1.1 million which was 

100 

 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

recorded as professional fees which is a component of administrative expenses in our 
statement of operations for the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010. 

We fully reserved the remaining balance of the loan due to the long term nature of the 
maturity date and uncertainty of collectability.  The total amount of $18.9 million was 
recorded in selling and administrative expenses in our statement of operations for the period 
March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010. 

Officer Separation Agreement 
On May 7, 2011, the Company entered into a separation agreement with an executive of the 
Company.  Under the terms on the agreement, the former executive agreed to act as a 
senior advisor to the Company for a year.  For these services, the former executive received 
a consulting fee of $2.0 million and the potential to receive an additional $3.0 million in 
success fees predicated upon certain criteria.  The success fee was fully earned and paid in 
October 2011. 

Other Transactions 
We paid $10.0 million to an entity controlled by a former executive of the Company at that 
time for consulting services rendered in connection with the March 9, 2010 financial 
restructuring.  The $10.0 million payment has been recorded as professional fees, which is a 
component of administrative expenses, in our statement of operations for the period 
March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010. 

16.  Segment Reporting 

As of December 31, 2012, we had two reportable segments (Education and Trade Publishing).  We 
measure and evaluate our reportable segments based on segment net sales and segment 
Adjusted EBITDA.  We exclude from segment Adjusted EBITDA certain corporate related 
expenses, as our corporate functions do not meet the definition of a segment, as defined in the 
accounting guidance relating to segment reporting.  In addition, certain transactions or adjustments 
that our Chief Operating Decision Maker considers to be non-recurring and/or non-operational, 
such as amounts related to goodwill and other intangible asset impairment charges and 
restructuring related charges, as well as amortization expenses, are excluded from segment 
Adjusted EBITDA.  Although we exclude these amounts from segment Adjusted EBITDA, they are 
included in reported consolidated operating income (loss) and are included in the reconciliation 
below.  

101 

 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

(in thousands)

2012
Net sales
Adjusted EBITDA

2011
Net sales
Adjusted EBITDA

Education

Year Ended December 31,
Trade Publishing

Corporate/Other

Total

$          

1,128,591
329,723

$              

157,050
28,774

-
$                        
(38,685)

$   

1,285,641
319,812

$          

1,169,645
278,930

$              

125,650
12,888

-
$                        
(53,620)

$   

1,295,295
238,198

For the period March 10, 2010 

to December 31, 2010

Net sales
Adjusted EBITDA

$          

1,290,429
510,871

$              

106,713
15,161

-
$                        
(53,281)

$   

1,397,142
472,751

For the period January 1, 2010 

to March 9, 2010

Net sales
Adjusted EBITDA

$               

92,718
(20,609)

$                

17,187
(2,431)

-
$                        
(8,974)

$      

109,905
(32,014)

Reconciliation of Adjusted EBITDA to the consolidated statements of operations is as follows: 

(in tho usands)

To tal A djusted EB ITDA  
Co nso lidated interest expense
P ro visio n (benefit) fo r inco me taxes
Depreciatio n expenses
A mo rtizatio n expenses (including capitalized permissio n settlements)
No n-cash charges - sto ck co mpensatio n
No n-cash charges - gain (lo ss) o n fo reign currency and interest hedge
No n-cash charges - asset impairment charges
P urchase acco unting adjustments (a)
Fees, expenses o r charges fo r equity o fferings, debt o r acquisitio ns
No n-recurring debt restructuring  (b)
No n-recurring restructuring  (c)
Severance, separatio n co sts and facility clo sures (d)
Reo rganziatio n items, net  (e) 
Net lo ss

S uc c e s s o r

P re de c e s s o r

Y e a r E nde d 
D e c e m be r 3 1,
2 0 12

Y e a r E nde d 
D e c e m be r 3 1,
2 0 11

F o r t he  P e rio d 
M a rc h 10 , 2 0 10  t o  
D e c e m be r 3 1,
2 0 10

F o r t he  P e rio d 
M a rc h 10 , 2 0 10  t o  
D e c e m be r 3 1,
2 0 10

$                        

$                                    

$                                    

319,812
(123,197)
5,943
(58,131)
(370,291)
(4,227)
1,688
(8,003)
16,511
(267)
-
(6,716)
(9,375)
149,114
(87,139)

$                       

238,198
(244,582)
100,153
(58,392)
(474,825)
(8,558)
(811)
(1,674,164)
(22,732)
(3,839)
-
-
(32,818)
-

$                

(2,182,370)

472,751
(258,174)
(11,929)
(48,649)
(475,099)
(4,274)
90,250
(103,933)
(113,182)
(1,513)
(30,000)
-
(23,975)
-
(507,727)

(32,014)
(157,947)
220
(10,900)
(88,265)
(925)
(7,361)
(4,028)
-
-
(9,564)
-
(992)
-
(311,776)

$                      

$                                

$                                   

(a) Represents certain non-cash accounting adjustments, most significantly relating to deferred revenue, and inventory costs , that we were 
required to record as a direct result of the March 9, 2010 Restructuring and the acquisitions for the years ended 2012, 2011 and 2010. 

(b) Represents fees paid and charged to operations relating to the March 9, 2010 Restructuring. 
(c) Represents non-recurring restructuring costs (other than severance and real estate) such as consulting and realignment. 
(d) Represents costs associated with the restructuring. Included in such costs are severance, facility integration and vacancy of excess 

facilities. 2010 costs also includes program integration and related inventory obsolescence and consulting costs. 

(e) Represents net gain associated with the Chapter 11 Reorganization.  

102 

 
 
                       
                     
                                   
                                    
                           
                        
                                      
                                             
                         
                       
                                    
                                      
                      
                     
                                  
                                     
                          
                          
                                       
                                           
                            
                               
                                      
                                         
                          
                   
                                   
                                        
                            
                       
                                     
                                              
                             
                          
                                         
                                              
                                
                                
                                    
                                        
                           
                                
                                             
                                              
                          
                        
                                    
                                           
                         
                                
                                             
                                              
 
 
 
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

Segment information as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 is as follows: 

(in thousands)

Goodwill - Education
Goodwill - Trade Publishing

Other intangible assets, net - Education
Other intangible assets, net - Trade Publishing

2012
$             

520,088

2011

$             

520,088

-

-

$             

520,088

$             

520,088

$             

$           

937,531
129,521
1,067,052

$          

$           

1,158,994
115,219
1,274,213

The following is a schedule of net sales by geographic region: 

$     

$     

1,223,852
61,789
1,285,641

$     

$     

1,240,807
54,488
1,295,295

$       

$       

105,312
4,593
109,905

$     

$     

1,301,143
95,999
1,397,142

(in thousands)

Year Ended December 31, 2012
Net sales - U.S.
Net sales - International
Total net sales

Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net sales - U.S.
Net sales - International
Total net sales

For the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010
Net sales - U.S.
Net sales - International
Total net sales

For the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010
Net sales - U.S.
Net sales - International
Total net sales

103 

 
                      
                      
               
               
 
           
           
             
           
 
HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc.  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 
December 31, 2012   

17.  Quarterly Results of Operations (Unaudited) 

Three Months Ended

2012:

March 31,

June 30,

Net sales
Gross profit
Operating income (loss)
Reorganization items, net
Net income (loss)

$        

165,229
731
(152,349)

-

(225,347)

$        

344,204
135,320
(21,897)
(156,894)
105,474

$        

September 30, December 31,
282,195
$        
81,864
(27,933)
7,780
(34,204)

494,013
236,302
81,492
-
66,938

2011:

Net sales
Gross profit
Operating income (loss)
Net income (loss)

$        

152,465
(24,095)
(194,706)
(274,267)

$        

328,605
107,877
(73,735)
(138,501)

$        

574,509
279,632
64,588
20,642

$        

239,716
11,816
(1,833,277)
(1,790,244)

Reorganization items, net for the year ended December 31, 2012 was $149.1 million.  The amount 
represents expense and income amounts that were recorded to the statement of operations as a result of 
the bankruptcy proceedings.  Reorganization items were incurred starting with the date of the bankruptcy 
filing through the date of bankruptcy emergence.   

104 

 
                
          
          
           
         
          
           
          
                 
         
                 
             
         
          
           
          
          
          
          
           
         
          
           
      
         
         
           
      
 
 
Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure 

None. 

Item 9A. Controls and Procedures 

Our management is responsible for the integrity and objectivity of all information presented in this report.  
The Financial Statements were prepared in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in 
the United States of America and include amounts based on our best estimates and judgments.  We 
believe that the Financial Statements fairly reflect the form and substance of transactions and that the 
Financial Statements fairly represent our financial condition and results of operations. 

As of the end of the period covered by this report, we were not subject to, and have never been subject 
to, the reporting requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as 
amended.  Since this report is not filed with the Securities Exchange Commission, we are not required to 
conduct an evaluation (as required under Rules 13a-15(b) and 15d-15(b) under the Securities Exchange 
Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”)), under the supervision and with the participation of the 
principal executive officer and principal financial officer, of our “disclosure controls and procedures” (as 
such term is defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Exchange Act). 

None.   

Item 9B. Other Information 

Item 10. Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance 

As of March 15, 2013, the executive officers and directors of HMH Holdings were as follows: 

         Age  

Name  
Executive Officers 
Linda K. Zecher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 President, Chief Executive Officer and Director 
Eric L. Shuman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer 
William F. Bayers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  58 Executive Vice President, Secretary and General 

Position 

Counsel  

Timothy L. Cannon . . . .  . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Executive Vice President, Strategy and Alliances  
Mary J. Cullinane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . 46 Chief Content Officer and Executive Vice President, Corporate 

Affairs  

Lee R. Ramsayer.  . .  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Executive Vice President, U.S. Sales 
John K. Dragoon . . . .  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Executive Vice President and Chief Marketing Officer 
Gary L. Gentel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . 60 President, HMH Trade Publishing 
Joanne M. Karimi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Executive Vice President, Human Resources 
Brook Colangelo . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . . . .35 Senior Vice President and Chief Information Officer 
Mark P. Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . 48 Senior Vice President, International Markets 

Directors 
Lawrence K. Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Chairman of the Board 
John R. McKernan, Jr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Director and Chair of Compensation Committee 
John F. Killian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Director and Chair of Audit Committee 
L. Gordon Crovitz . . . .  . . . . . . . . . . . .  54 Director  
Sheru Chowdhry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  39 Director 
Jill A. Greenthal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . …  56 Director and Chair of Nominating, Ethics and 

Governance Committee 

105 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
           
 
 
E. Rogers Novak, Jr.. . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Director 
Linda K. Zecher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Director 

The following information provides a brief description of the business experience of each 
executive officer and director. 

Executive Officers 

Linda K. Zecher, President, Chief Executive Officer and Director 

Linda joined Houghton Mifflin Harcourt in September 2011 as President, Chief Executive Officer 
and Director.  Previously, she served as Corporate Vice President of Microsoft's Worldwide 
Public Sector organization since 2009.  She also served as Microsoft’s Vice President Public 
Sector, Americas and Asia Pacific from 2008 to 2009, and as Vice President, US Public Sector 
from 2003 to 2008.  Prior to joining Microsoft in 2003, Linda held leadership positions with Texas 
Instruments, Bank of America, PeopleSoft, Oracle and Evolve Corp.  She currently serves on the 
U.S. State Department’s Board for Overseas Schools, the Focused Ultrasound Surgery 
Foundation Advisory Council, and the Emily Couric Leadership Forum.  Linda is also a former 
member of the Intelligence National Security Association, the Virginia Piedmont Technology 
Council, and James Madison University’s Board of Visitors.  Linda’s extensive sales, marketing 
and technology experience enables her to provide the Company with effective leadership in the 
conduct of its rapidly changing business. 

Eric L. Shuman, Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer  

Eric joined the Company in October 2009 as Executive Vice President and K-12 Chief Operating 
Officer.  From November 2011 to January 2012, he served as Executive Vice President and K-12 
Chief Operating Officer and Interim Chief Financial Officer.  He began his current role with the 
Company in January 2012.  Prior to joining Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, Eric was with Thomson 
Lifelong Learning Group, a division of Thomson Corporation, where he served as Chief Executive 
Officer from September 2005 to December 2007.  Previously, Eric was Senior Vice President and 
Chief Financial Officer from June 1994 to September 2005 for Thomson Reuters, and Vice 
President and Corporate Controller for Thomson Newspapers.  

William F. Bayers, Executive Vice President, Secretary and General Counsel  

Bill joined Houghton Mifflin Harcourt in May of 2007 as Senior Vice President, Secretary and 
General Counsel and was made Executive Vice President, Secretary and General Counsel in 
March 2008.  Previously, he served as Vice President and General Counsel of Harcourt 
Education Group.  Bill oversees all legal, regulatory and corporate matters for the Company.  He 
is a graduate of Harvard College and Harvard Law School. 

Timothy L. Cannon, Executive Vice President, Strategy and Alliances   

Before joining HMH in November 2011, Tim was Senior Director of Business Strategy for 
Microsoft’s Worldwide Public Sector organization from September 2008 to November 2011, 
where he oversaw the development and execution of business strategies to better serve 
Government, Education and Health customers and partners worldwide.  Prior to that role, Tim 
was Senior Director of Business Strategy for Microsoft’s U.S Public Sector from October 2006 to 
September 2008.  He has also held leadership roles at companies like Digital Equipment 
Corporation and Oracle.  Tim serves on the board of the Center for Entrepreneurship and 
Innovation at the University of Florida and on the advisory board for the School of Engineering at 
George Mason University. 

106 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Mary J. Cullinane, Chief Content Officer and Executive Vice President, Corporate Affairs  

Mary joined HMH in February 2012.  Prior to joining HMH, Mary served as Worldwide Senior 
Director, Innovation and Education Policy for Microsoft from May 2010 to December 2011. 
Prior to that role, Mary served as Director, Innovation and Business Development for Microsoft 
from July 2008 until May 2010 and as Director, U.S. Partners In Learning for Microsoft from 
February 2006 to July 2008.  Mary holds a Master of Public Policy and Administration from 
Columbia University and a Bachelor of Arts from The College of New Jersey. 

Lee R. Ramsayer, Executive Vice President, U.S. Sales 

Before joining Houghton Mifflin Harcourt in February 2012, Lee served as Senior Vice President 
of Sales for Monster Worldwide, Inc.’s Government Solutions sector.  Prior to his role at Monster, 
Lee served as Manager, Government Sales and Consulting Services for Microsoft from January 
2004 to February 2005.  Lee currently serves on the board of Innovate Education, a national 
organization focused on STEM education. 

John K. Dragoon, Executive Vice President and Chief Marketing Officer 

John joined Houghton Mifflin Harcourt in April 2012. Previously, he served as Chief Marketing 
Officer and Channel Chief of Novell from October 2003 to April 2011, where he led the company’s 
Marketing and Partner programs for over seven years. Prior to joining Novell, John served as 
Senior Vice President, Marketing and Product Management at Art Technology Group (ATG) from 
2002 to 2003. Before ATG, John served as Vice President, Operations at Internet Capital Group 
from 2000 to 2002. John also spent more than 16 years at IBM, where he held a number of 
marketing and sales positions. He holds an MBA from Cornell University and a BS from Union 
College. 

Gary L. Gentel, President, HMH Trade Publishing 

Gary joined Houghton Mifflin Harcourt in October 2003 as Corporate Vice President and Director 
of Trade Sales and was promoted to Interim President of the combined Trade Group in July 2007. 
He was given the permanent position in December of that year. Previously, he served as 
President of Candlewick Press—a children’s publisher based in Cambridge, SVP of Trade Sales 
at Scholastic Books, and SVP and Publisher of The Grosset and Dunlap Group at GP Putnam’s 
Sons—now a division of Penguin Books.  Gary started his publishing career as a Sales 
Representative at Random House in 1980, rising to VP of Children’s Sales by 1990. 

Joanne M. Karimi, Executive Vice President, Human Resources 

Joanne joined Houghton Mifflin Harcourt in February of 2011.  From June 2010 to November 
2010, Joanne served as Leader of Human Capital for PacifiCord, the U.S. subsidiary of a Taiwan-
based Biomedical company called Health Banks that specializes in biotechnology, stem cell 
therapy, and cord blood processing and storage.  Prior to her role at Pacificord, Joanne worked 
as an independent consultant from January 2008 until June 2010 and as Executive Vice 
President, Human Resources for CCI Valve, a company focused on design and manufacture of 
severe service control and isolation valves for the severe service applications of the power, oil 
and gas and nuclear industries, from July 2007 to September 2008. She also worked at Faro 
Technologies from August 1998 to April 2007. 

Brook Colangelo, Senior Vice President and Chief Information Officer 

Brook joined HMH from the White House where he held the role of Chief Information Officer from 
January 2009 to January 2013.  In November 2008 he joined President-Elect Obama’s team as 
Deputy Technology Team Leader to lead the technology effort for the Obama-Biden transition 

107 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
project.  From June 2007 to November 2008 he was the CIO for the Democratic National 
Convention Committee.  He also held senior IT leadership roles with The American Red Cross’ 
Hurricane Recovery Program and QRS Newmedia.  Brook holds an honors degree in Political 
Communications from The George Washington University. 

Mark P. Short, Senior Vice President, International Markets 

Mark joined HMH in December 2012 from Pearson Education where he served as Senior Vice 
President, Sales and Marketing, English Language Training from August 2008 to October 2012.  
He had served as Vice President, Sales and Marketing for Pearson Education from February 
2007 to August 2008.   Prior to that, he held a number of senior regional management, sales and 
marketing roles across Asia Pacific, Latin America, and Europe as part of Pearson’s global 
education business.  As head of the International Markets division, Mark leads a sales, marketing 
and business development team responsible for extending the HMH’s global footprint across key 
markets in Asia Pacific, Latin America and the Middle East.   

Directors 

Lawrence K. Fish, Director and Chairman of the Board 

Lawrence K. Fish has served as a member of the board of directors since August 2010 and 
Chairman of the Board since January 2011. Mr. Fish served as Chairman and Chief Executive 
Officer of Citizens Financial Group, Inc. (“Citizens”) from 2005 to 2008 and before as Chairman, 
President and Chief Executive Officer, from 1992, of Citizens.  Mr. Fish is a member of the Board 
of Trustees of Massachusetts Institute of Technology. He serves on the boards of Textron Inc., 
Tiffany & Co., and NBH Holdings Corp. He is also an Honorary Trustee of the Brookings 
Institution in Washington D.C. Mr. Fish’s extensive experience in the areas of finance, marketing, 
general management and corporate governance enables him to provide the Company with 
effective leadership on the board of directors. 

John R. McKernan, Jr., Director and Chair of Compensation Committee 

John R. McKernan, Jr. served as a member of the board of directors from August 2010 through 
June 2012 and rejoined the board in September 2012. Mr. McKernan is currently Chairman and 
Chief Executive Officer of McKernan Enterprises, Inc., in Portland, Maine.  He is the former 
Chairman of Education Management Corporation, a provider of post-secondary education in 
North America, where he served as Chief Executive Officer from September 2003 until February 
2007 and continues to serve as a director. Mr. McKernan is a director of BorgWarner Inc. and 
served as Governor of the State of Maine from 1987 to 1995.  Mr. McKernan is currently 
Chairman of the Board of Directors of The Foundation for Maine’s Community Colleges and 
serves on the board of the U.S. Chamber of Commerce’s Institute for a Competitive Workforce.  
Mr. McKernan brings to the board superior leadership capabilities, knowledge of the legal and 
legislative processes and significant prior experience as a director. 

John F. Killian, Director and Chair of Audit Committee 

John F. Killian has served as a member of the board of directors since January 2011. Mr. Killian 
was Executive Vice President for Verizon and served as Verizon’s Chief Financial Officer from 
March 2009 through October 2010. Prior to becoming CFO, Mr. Killian was President of Verizon 
Business from October 2005 until March 2009, the Senior Vice President and Chief Financial 
Officer of Verizon Telecom from June 2003 until October 2005, and the Senior Vice President 
and Controller of Verizon Telecom from April 2002 until June 2003. Mr. Killian serves on the 
board of directors at ConEdison Inc. and is a Chairman of the Board of Providence College.  Mr. 
Killian brings extensive financial expertise to the board, as well as significant management and 
leadership experience. 

108 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
L. Gordon Crovitz, Director 

L. Gordon Crovitz has served as a member of the board of directors since August 2012. From 
1980-2007 Mr. Crovitz held a number of positions with Dow Jones and the Wall Street Journal 
culminating in his role as Executive Vice President for Dow Jones and Publisher of The Wall 
Street Journal.  He was co-founder of e-commerce software company Press+ in 2009. Mr. Crovitz 
serves on the Board of Directors at Minneapolis Star Tribune, Business Insider, Blurb and Marin 
Software. He is on the board of the American Association of Rhodes Scholars.  Mr. Crovitz’s 
management roles in the publishing industry and extensive experience as a director enables him 
to provide the Company with valuable guidance. 

Sheru Chowdhry, Director 

Sheru Chowdhry served as a member of the board of directors from March 2010 through March 
2012 and rejoined the board in June 2012. Mr. Chowdhry joined Paulson & Co. Inc., a hedge 
fund, in 2004 as a Senior Vice President and has been a Managing Director and Head of 
Distressed & Bankruptcy Research since 2008. Previously, he was a research analyst at 
DebtTraders Inc., covering distressed and bankrupt securities, and an investment banker in the 
Mergers & Acquisitions Group at JP Morgan Securities.  Mr. Chowdhry’s financial expertise and 
significant experience with debt and equity capital markets render him a valuable member of the 
board. 

Jill A. Greenthal, Director and Chair of Nominating, Ethics, and Governance Committee 

Jill A. Greenthal has served as a member of the board of directors since June 2012. Ms. 
Greenthal has been a Senior Advisor in Private Equity at the Blackstone Group since 2007, 
working closely with the company’s global media and technology teams to assist in investments 
in those sectors. She also currently serves as a director of Akamai Technologies, Orbitz 
Worldwide, Michaels Stores and The Weather Channel Companies. Prior to 2007, Ms. Greenthal 
was an investment banker and partner at Blackstone and Credit Suisse First Boston.  Ms. 
Greenthal has extensive experience in the media industry and in advising technology and media 
companies, which enables her to provide valuable guidance to the Company. 

E. Rogers Novak, Jr., Director 

E. Rogers Novak, Jr. has served as a member of the board of directors since November 2012.  
He is a founder and managing member of Novak Biddle Venture Partners, an early-stage venture 
fund focused on investment opportunities in businesses focused on education, security, big data 
analytics, and business-to-business-to-consumer. Roger formerly served as Lead Director of 
Blackboard which was acquired by Providence Equity Partners.  Roger currently serves on 
several private company boards and is a member of the External Relations Council for the 
Department of Homeland Security’s Predict project. He also serves on the Board of Trustees for 
Kenyon College where he sits on the Budget, Financial and Audit Committee and the Information 
Resources Committee. From 2008 to 2011, Roger held a seat on the Board of the National 
Venture Capital Association and was their Treasurer and a member of their Executive Committee 
from 2009 to 2011. Mr. Novak’s significant prior experience as a director, especially in the 
education technology sector, render him a valuable member of the board. 

Board of Directors 
HMH Holdings’ board of directors is currently composed of eight individuals, one of whom is the Chief 
Executive Officer.  A majority of the Directors, including the Chairperson, must be “independent” under 
NYSE standards.  The independent directors are Lawrence K. Fish, John R. McKernan, Jr., John F. 
Killian, L. Gordon Crovitz, Jill A. Greenthal, and E. Rogers Novak, Jr.    

109 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Nomination Agreement 
Paulson & Co., Inc. (“Paulson”) and HMH have entered into a nomination agreement which provides that 
Paulson has the right to nominate two Directors, one of whom must be an “independent” Director under 
NYSE standards (the “Independent Director”) and the other nominated by Paulson (the “Holder Director”).  
The initial Holder Director is Sheru Chowdhry and the Independent Director is John McKernan.  Any 
vacancy in the Independent Director position shall be nominated by Paulson in consultation with the 
nominating committee of the Board of Directors and shall be subject to approval by the majority of the 
Board of Directors; any vacancy in the Holder Director shall be nominated by Paulson and (i) filled with a 
full-time Paulson employee or (ii) selected in consultation with the nominating committee and approved by 
a majority of the Board of Directors (excluding the Independent Director).  The right to nominate the 
Independent Director terminates if Paulson holds less than 20% of the issued and outstanding New 
Common Stock and the right to nominate the Holder Director terminates if Paulson holds less than 15% 
of the issued and outstanding common stock.  All nominating rights terminate upon an IPO.  If Paulson 
transfers at least 20% of the issued and outstanding common stock to a Transferee, the nominating rights 
with respect to only the Holder Director (and any successor in the event of a vacancy) may be assigned 
to the Transferee (subject to the same termination events – 15% ownership threshold or an initial public 
offering).  In the event that any other shareholder acquires 20% or more of the issued and outstanding 
common stock (a “Nominating Holder”), such Nominating Holder will also be entitled to nominate one 
director to the Board of Directors immediately pursuant to a nomination agreement (which HMH shall be 
required to enter into if the Nominating Holder so elects) in form and substance substantially similar to the 
Paulson nomination agreement.  If the Nominating Holder became a Nominating Holder other than by 
acquiring the stock of an existing 20% shareholder, the size of the Board of Directors will be increased in 
order to elect the director chosen by such Nominating Holder.  As with the Paulson nomination 
agreement, the Nominating Holder nomination agreement will terminate upon an IPO or if the Nominating 
Holder owns less than 15% of the outstanding common stock.  As long as Paulson or a Nominating 
Holder does not hold less than 20% of the issued and outstanding common stock, respectively, the 
directors nominated by Paulson or such Holder, respectively, will be eligible for re-election at each annual 
meeting until an initial public offering. 

Board of Directors Committees  
HMH Holdings’ board of directors has three committees: the audit committee, the compensation 
committee and the nominating, ethics, and governance committee. Messrs. Killian, Chowdhry, Fish, and 
Mses. Greenthal serve on the audit committee, which oversees and meets with management, the internal 
auditors and the independent auditors to review internal accounting controls and accounting, auditing, 
and financial reporting matters. Mr. Killian is the audit committee financial expert.  Messrs. McKernan, 
Chowdhry, Crovitz, Fish, and Killian serve on the compensation committee, which reviews the 
compensation of HMH’s executive officers, executive bonus allocations and other compensation matters. 
Ms. Greenthal, Messrs. Crovitz, Fish, and Novak serve on the nominating, ethics and governance 
committee, which identifies individuals qualified to become members of the board of directors, develops 
and recommends corporate governance guidelines and oversees the evaluation of the board of directors 
and management.   

Code of Ethics  

We have adopted a Code of Conduct policy which applies to all officers and employees of the Company.  
The Code Conduct is the foundation of our ethics and compliance program and covers a wide range of 
areas.  Many of our policies are summarized in the Code of Conduct, including our policies regarding 
conflict of interest, honest and ethical conduct, discrimination and harassment, confidentiality and 
compliance with laws and regulations applicable to the conduct of our business. All employees are 
required to comply with the Code of Conduct and are subject to disciplinary action, including termination, 
for violations.  The Code of Conduct is published on our website at www.hmhco.com under the heading 
“Investor Relations” and is also available in print to any person who requests it by writing to: Houghton 
Mifflin Harcourt, Investor Relations, 222 Berkeley Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02116.  Any 
amendments to the Code of Conduct or the grant of a waiver from a provision of the Code Conduct 
requiring disclosure under applicable SEC rules will be disclosed on our website.  Under our Code of 

110 

 
 
 
Conduct all employees have a duty to report any violation or suspected violation of the policy or the law to 
the appropriate personnel as identified in the policy.   

Item 11. Executive Compensation 

Compensation Discussion and Analysis 

Compensation Program Philosophy and Objectives 
Following the Company’s emergence from bankruptcy in June 2012, we implemented a compensation 
program designed to help us attract and retain a management team capable of implementing our plan of 
reorganization.  To be successful, our employees needed to overcome uncertain economic conditions.  
Therefore, we structured a compensation program designed to protect our assets in the near-term and 
position us for future growth.  Now that the Company has successfully emerged from bankruptcy, the 
current Compensation Committee plans to do a thorough review of the Company’s compensation goals 
and policies, and overall compensation objectives in 2013 for 2014 to ensure that its compensation 
programs continue to align executive compensation of key employees with the best interests of 
stockholders by rewarding performance based upon the attainment of annual financial and strategic 
goals. 

The goal of the Company’s compensation program for its named executive officers is the same as for the 
entire Company, which is to foster compensation policies and practices that attract, engage, and motivate 
high caliber talent by offering a competitive pay and benefits program.  The Company is committed to a 
total compensation philosophy and structure that provides flexibility in responding to market factors; 
rewards and recognizes superior performance; attracts highly skilled, experienced, and capable 
employees; and is fair and fiscally responsible.  Most of the Company’s compensation elements 
simultaneously fulfill one or more of our performance, alignment, or retention objectives.   

The Process of Setting Executive Compensation  
Our Compensation Committee meets throughout the year to evaluate the performance of our named 
executive officers, to determine their bonuses for the prior fiscal year, to establish the individual and 
corporate performance objectives for each executive for the current fiscal year, and to consider and 
approve any grants of equity incentive compensation.  Our Compensation Committee also reviews the 
appropriateness of the financial measures used in our incentive plans and the degree of difficulty in 
achieving specific performance targets.  Our Compensation Committee engages in an active dialogue 
with our Chief Executive Officer concerning strategic objectives and performance targets. All 
Compensation Committee decisions are recommended to the Board of Directors and the Board of 
Directors ultimately makes the final determination.   

In making compensation decisions, the Compensation Committee considers the following: 

•  Company Performance.  The Compensation Committee reviews the Company’s operational 

performance and the achievement of its pre-established goals for the fiscal year.   

•  Executives’ Performance.  The Compensation Committee evaluates an executive’s 

performance during the year including leadership qualities, responsibilities, and contribution 
to the Company’s performance.  The relative importance of each factor varies among the 
Company’s named executive officers depending on their positions and the particular 
operations or functions for which they are responsible. 

•  Recommendations of the Chief Executive Officer.  The Compensation Committee considers 

the recommendations of the Company’s Chief Executive Officer, who assesses the 
performance of the other named executive officers and adjustments to their base salary and 
other elements of compensation. 

111 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Management’s Role in the Compensation-Setting Process 
Our Chief Executive Officer, Ms. Zecher, plays a significant role in the compensation-setting process.  Ms. 
Zecher evaluates the performance of the other named executive officers, recommends business 
performance targets and objectives for the other named executive officers, and recommends salary and 
bonus levels and option awards for other executive officers.  All recommendations of Ms. Zecher are 
subject to Compensation Committee approval.  Ms. Zecher’s compensation, performance targets, and 
objectives are reviewed by the Compensation Committee and upon approval are recommended to the 
Board of Directors.  The Board of Directors sets Ms. Zecher’s compensation.  

Elements of Executive Compensation 

Base Salary 
Base pay provides executives with a base level of regular income.  In determining a named executive 
officer’s base salary, we consider the executive’s qualifications, experience, and industry knowledge, the 
quality and effectiveness of their leadership at our Company, the scope of their responsibilities and future 
potential, the goals and objectives established for the executive, the executive’s past performance, 
internal pay equity, and other factors as deemed appropriate.  In addition, we consider the other 
components of executive compensation and the mix of performance pay to total compensation.  The 
Compensation Committee does not apply any specific weighting to these factors.  The minimum salaries 
for the named executive offers are as reflected in applicable employment agreements.  

The 2012 annual base salaries for our named executive officers were as follows:  

Named Executive Officer 
Linda Zecher 
Eric Shuman 
John Dragoon 
Bethlam Forsa 
William Bayers 

Salary 
$750,000 
$500,000 
$400,000 
$400,000 
$400,000 

Annual Cash Bonus 
Our bonus program is intended to motivate and reward performance by providing incentive bonuses 
based upon meeting and exceeding individual and Company performance goals.  Other than for our Chief 
Executive Officer, we award annual incentive bonuses under a bonus plan (the Bonus Plan).  Each 
named executive officer has a specified payout target as a percentage of base salary based on the 
executive’s position and level of responsibility.  The named executive officers had the following bonus 
targets (as a percentage of base salary) for 2012:  

Named Executive Officer 

Linda Zecher 
Eric Shuman 
John Dragoon 
Bethlam Forsa 
William Bayers 

Bonus Target 
Percentages 
125% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 

Under the Bonus Plan, the total maximum bonus for each executive is allocated between two bonus 
objectives – individual performance (25%) and EBITDA (75%) as established in the Company’s annual 
budget.  The relative weight or percentage of the maximum available bonus for each objective is based 
on the importance of the objective for the year and the ability of the executive to influence the result.  The 
payout based on the applicable financial metrics is determined in accordance with the following schedule: 

112 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% Achievement of EBITDA 
Target  

0% - 89.79% 
89.8% - 92.99% 
93.0% - 96.49% 
96.5% - 99.99% 
100% - 101.79% 
101.8% - 103.49% 
103.5% and up 

Payout as a Percentage of 
EBITDA Component of 
Total Maximum Bonus 
Opportunity 
0.0% 
25.0% 
50.0% 
75.0% 
100.0% 
120.0% 
140.0% 

For 2012, the Company’s Operating EBITDA target was $301 million.  The Bonus Plan is meant to be 
self-funding and although the Company achieved its’ $301 million operating EBITDA target, there was not 
sufficient funding to pay 100% of the bonus level.   Therefore, the EBITDA component of the bonus was 
paid at the 75% level subject to adjustments made by the Chief Executive Officer and approved by the 
Board. 

With respect to our named executive officers other than Ms. Zecher, Ms. Zecher recommends to the 
Board of Directors the size of an award by considering his or her individual performance as measured 
against pre-set individual performance targets and objectives.  Each named executive officer receives his 
or her bonus amount based on the assessment of individual performance relative to such predetermined 
specific performance goals.  With respect to our Chief Executive Officer, the Compensation Committee 
reviews and evaluates her performance against pre-set performance goals determined by the 
Compensation Committee.   

Ms. Zecher’s performance objectives included an EBITDA target and personal objectives.   Based on its 
review of Ms. Zecher’s 2012 performance, the Compensation Committee determined that Ms. Zecher 
achieved substantially all of her goals, and awarded a bonus equal to 96% of her target bonus. 

The personal objectives for each of Messrs. Shuman, Dragoon and Bayers, which comprised 25% of his 
respective target bonus, were substantially consistent with Ms. Zecher’s personal objectives, and were 
deemed by the Compensation Committee to have been achieved after taking into account each named 
executive officer’s respective efforts in connection with the Company’s emergence from bankruptcy, and 
pro-rating the amount for Mr. Dragoon to reflect the portion of the fiscal year he was actually employed by 
us. Our Chief Executive Officer recommended that Messrs. Shuman, Dragoon and Bayers be paid an 
annual bonus in an amount equal to 96%, 62.5% and 100%, respectively, of each officer’s target bonus, 
and such awards were approved by the Compensation Committee. 

Ms. Forsa’s employment with us terminated on January 3, 2013.  As part of the negotiation of her 
separation agreement with us, Ms. Forsa was awarded 100% of her target bonus. 

Equity Incentives 
Equity awards are a significant component of our executive officer compensation.  In connection with our 
emergence from bankruptcy all awards granted prior to our emergence from bankruptcy were cancelled.  
All equity awards are now granted under our 2012 Management Incentive Plan (the “MIP”), which is 
designed to align the interests of our stockholders and executive officers by increasing the proprietary 
interest of our executive officers in our growth and success, to advance our interests by attracting and 
retaining key employees, and motivating such executives to act in our long-term best interests.  We grant 
equity awards to promote the success and enhance the value of the Company by providing participants 
with an incentive for outstanding performance.  Equity-based awards also provide the Company with the 
flexibility to motivate, attract, and retain the services of employees upon whose judgment, interest, and 
special effort the successful conduct of our operation is largely dependent.  We believe that equity awards 

113 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
provide long-term incentives to executive officers because they tie the executive officers’ financial 
interests to those of our shareholders. 

As part of the negotiations with creditors in connection with our emergence from bankruptcy, we 
established the overall size of the option pool (10% of the fully-diluted outstanding shares) as well as the 
allocation of initial grants under the MIP to executive officers, which are set forth below: 

Named Executive Officer 

Linda Zecher 
Eric Shuman 
John Dragoon 
Bethlam Forsa 
William Bayers 

Stock Options Granted 
(#) 
1,842,105 
818,714 
614,035 
491,228 
327,485 

Percentage of Fully-Diluted 
Outstanding Shares 
2.25% 
1.00% 
.75% 
.60% 
.40% 

The exercise price of all stock options granted by the Board of Directors cannot be less than 100% of the 
fair market value (as determined under the MIP) of the common stock on the date of the grant.  The stock 
options granted in fiscal 2012 have an exercise price of $25.00 per share, which is equal to the value of 
our common stock established in the Plan of Reorganization as of the date of emergence from 
bankruptcy.  Stock options generally are subject to a four-year vesting schedule and expire seven years 
after the date of grant. 

Employee Benefits 
Executive officers participate in other employee benefit plans generally available to all employees on the 
same terms, such as a 401(k) plan with a Company matching contribution.  In addition, certain executive 
officers participate in an executive life insurance plan.  We also provide parking, tax preparation, moving 
expenses, and tax gross-ups for moving expenses to certain of our named executive officers. These 
plans are designed to enable us to attract and retain our workforce in a competitive marketplace.  

Change in Control Severance Plan 
We believe that companies should provide reasonable severance benefits to executive officers due to the 
greater level of difficulty they face in finding comparable employment in a short period of time and greater 
risk of job loss or modification as a result of a change-in-control transaction than other employees.  In 
recognition of the need to retain key personnel during a period of significant change and uncertainty, we 
adopted a Change in Control Severance Plan in December 2012.  The Change in Control Severance 
Plan is designed (i) to retain our executives and (ii) to align their interests with our stockholders’ interests 
so that they can consider transactions that are in the best interests of our stockholders and maintain their 
focus without concern regarding how any such transaction might personally affect them.  The Change in 
Control Severance Plan provides for “double trigger” severance payments, which means that both a 
change in control and a termination of employment must occur in order for a named executive officer’s 
severance benefits to be triggered in connection with a change in control.  

See “Potential Post-Employment Payments Upon Termination or Change in Control” for a more detailed 
description of the benefits payable under the Change in Control Severance Plan. 

Reasonableness of Compensation 
The Compensation Committee does not adhere to rigid formulas when determining the amount and mix 
of compensation elements.  Compensation elements for each executive are reviewed in a manner that 
optimizes the executive’s contribution to the Company and reflects an evaluation of the compensation 
paid by the Company’s competitors.  The Compensation Committee reviews both current pay and the 
opportunity for future compensation to achieve an appropriate mix between equity incentive awards and 
cash payments in order to meet its objectives.  The mix of compensation elements is designed to reward 
recent results and motivate long-term performance through a combination of cash and equity incentive 
awards.   

114 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Compensation Committee Report 
The Compensation Committee has reviewed and discussed the Compensation Discussion and Analysis 
with management and, based on such review and discussions, the Compensation Committee 
recommended to the Board of Directors that the Compensation Discussion and Analysis be included in 
this Annual Report. 

Members of the Compensation Committee: 

John R. McKernan, Jr. (chair) 
Sheru Chowdhry 
L. Gordon Crovitz 
Lawrence K. Fish  
John F. Killian 
E. Rogers Novak, Jr. 

115 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Summary Compensation Table For Fiscal Year 2012  

The following table sets forth the cash and non-cash compensation paid by us or incurred on our 

behalf to our named executive officers during 2012, our last completed fiscal year.   

Name and 
Principal 
Position 

Linda Zecher 

Chief Executive 
Officer 

  Year   
2012 

Salary 
($) 

Bonus
($) 

Stock 
Awards 
($) 

Option 
Awards 
($)(1) 

Non-Equity 
Incentive Plan 
Compensation 
($)(2) 

All Other 
Compensation 
($)(3) 

Total 
($) 

750,000 

__ 

__ 

10,205,262

900,000 

67,409 

11,922,671

Eric Shuman 

2012 

500,000 

__ 

__ 

4,535,676 

480,000 

17,075 

5,532,751 

Executive Vice 
President/ 

Chief Financial 
Officer 

John Dragoon (4) 

2012 

284,615 

__ 

__ 

3,401,754 

250,000 

3,915 

3,940,284 

Executive Vice 
President/ 

Chief Marketing 
Officer 

Bethlam Forsa (5) 

2012 

400,000 

__ 

__ 

2,721,403 

400,000 

7,350 

3,528,753 

Executive Vice 
President/ 

K-12 Product 
Development 

William Bayers 

2012 

400,000 

__ 

__ 

1,814,267 

400,000 

26,420 

2,640,687 

Executive Vice 
President/ 

General 
Counsel, 
Secretary 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

Represents the aggregate grant date fair value of stock options granted during the year in 
accordance with the Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification 
(“FASB ASC”) Topic 718, Stock Compensation (disregarding any forfeiture assumptions). See 
Note 12 to our consolidated financial for the assumptions made in determining these values.  
These values do not correspond to the actual values that may be realized by our named executive 
officers for these awards.     
Represents awards made pursuant to the Bonus Plan in respect of the year indicated, although 
the awards were actually paid in the following year. 
For Ms. Zecher, this amount represents Company-paid life insurance premiums ($12,564); parking 
($5,220); moving expenses ($29,843); and tax gross-ups for moving ($19,782).  For Mr. Shuman, 
this amount represents employer matching contributions to our 401(k) plan ($7,350); parking 
($5,220) and Company-paid life insurance premiums ($4,505).  For Mr. Dragoon, this amount 
represents parking ($3,915).  For Ms. Forsa, this amount represents employer matching 
contributions to our 401(k) plan ($7,350).  For Mr. Bayers, this amount represents employer 
matching contributions to our 401(k) plan ($7,350); parking ($5,220); tax preparation assistance 
($1,571) and Company-paid life insurance premiums ($12,279). 

(4)  Mr. Dragoon was hired on April 9, 2012. 
(5)  Ms. Forsa’s employment terminated effective January 3, 2013. 

116 

 
 
 
 
 
   
   
  
 
 
     
    
     
     
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
   
  
   
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
   
   
  
   
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
   
   
  
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
  
   
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
   
  
   
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
Grants of Plan-Based Awards For Fiscal Year 2012 
The following table details grants to our named executive officers during 2012: 

Estimated Future Payouts 
Under Non-Equity 
Incentive Plan Awards(1) 

Grant 
Date    

Threshold 
($) 

Target  
($) 

Maximum 
 ($) 

All Other 
Option Awards: 
Number of 
Securities 
Underlying 

Options(#) (3)    

Exercise Price of 
Option Awards($)   

Grant Date 
Fair Value of 
Option 
Awards($)(2) 

6/22/12 

  937,500 

1,842,105 

25.00 

10,205,262 

6/22/12 

218,750  500,000 

650,000 

818,717 

25.00 

4,535,676 

6/22/12   

175,000  400,000   

520,000     

614,035 

25.00 

3,401,754 

6/22/12 

175,000  400,000 

520,000 

491,228 

6/22/12   

175,000  400,000   

520,000     

327,485 

25.00 

25.00 

2,721,403 

1,814,267 

For a description of the material terms of these awards, please see the “Compensation 
Discussion and Analysis—Elements of Executive Compensation—Annual Cash Bonus Plans.” 
We estimated the fair value of option awards on the grant date using the Black-Scholes option-
pricing model and in accordance with the FASB ASC Topic 718.  See Note 12 to our consolidated 
financial statements for the assumptions made in determining these values. 
For Ms. Zecher, the options vested 25% on the date of grant and vest 25% on June 22, 2013, 
June 22, 2014 and June 22, 2015.  For all other executives, the options vest over four years with 
25% vesting on June 22, 2013, June 22, 2014, June 22, 2015 and June 22, 2016. 

Linda 
Zecher 

Eric 
Shuman 

John 
Dragoon 

Bethlam 
Forsa 

William 
Bayers 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

Employment Agreements 
We have entered into an employment agreement with each of our named executive officers.  For a 
description of the severance benefits each executive is entitled to receive upon a termination of 
employment pursuant to the terms of his or her employment agreement, please see “Potential Post-
Employment Payments Upon Termination or Change in Control”. 

Linda Zecher 
Ms. Zecher’s employment agreement provides that Ms. Zecher will continue to serve as our President 
and Chief Executive Officer until her employment is terminated by us or by Ms. Zecher, which may be at 
any time, with or without cause, subject to the provisions of her employment agreement.  In consideration 
for her receipt of stock options, the agreement contains a covenant not to engage in any business that 
competes with us or to solicit employees or customers during the term of her employment and for a period 
of one year thereafter, as well as non-disparagement, confidentiality, and intellectual property provisions.  
The provisions of Ms. Zecher’s employment agreement that relate to equity grants are no longer effective 
following our emergence from bankruptcy. 

Ms. Zecher is entitled to receive an annual base salary of $750,000 and is eligible for an annual target 
bonus of 125% of her base salary based on the achievement of performance goals established by our 
Board of Directors for such fiscal year.  Ms. Zecher is entitled to four weeks of vacation per year. 

117 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
       
 
    
 
    
   
    
 
  
    
 
     
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Eric Shuman 
Mr. Shuman’s employment agreement provides that Mr. Shuman will continue to serve as our Executive 
Vice President/Chief Financial Officer until his employment is terminated by us or by Mr. Shuman, which 
may be at any time, with or without cause, subject to the provisions of his employment agreement.  In 
consideration for his receipt of stock options, the agreement contains a covenant not to engage in any 
business that competes with us or to solicit employees or customers during the term of his employment 
and for a period of one year thereafter, as well as non-disparagement and intellectual property provisions. 

Mr. Shuman is entitled to receive an annual base salary of $500,000, and in accordance with the terms of 
his employment agreement, the Bonus Plan, and our benefit policies, is eligible for an annual target 
bonus of 100% of his base salary.  Mr. Shuman is entitled to four weeks of vacation per year. 

John Dragoon 
We entered into an employment agreement on March 27, 2012, with John Dragoon with an effective date 
of April 9, 2012.  Mr. Dragoon’s employment agreement provides that Mr. Dragoon will continue to serve 
as our Executive Vice President and Chief Marketing Officer until his employment is terminated by us or 
by Mr. Dragoon, which may be at any time, with or without cause, subject to the provisions of his 
employment agreement.  In consideration for his receipt of stock options, the agreement contains a 
covenant not to engage in any business that competes with us or to solicit employees or customers 
during the term of his employment and for a period of one year thereafter, as well as non-disparagement, 
confidentiality, and intellectual property provisions. 

Mr. Dragoon is entitled to receive an annual base salary of $400,000, and in accordance with the terms of 
his employment agreement, the Bonus Plan, and our benefit policies, is eligible for an annual target 
bonus of 100% of his base salary.  Mr. Dragoon is entitled to four weeks of vacation per year. 

Bethlam Forsa 
Ms. Forsa’s employment terminated effective January 3, 2013, and we subsequently entered into a 
separation agreement with her dated January 10, 2013.   

Prior to the termination of her employment, Ms. Forsa’s employment agreement provided that Ms. Forsa 
would serve as our Executive Vice President – Publishing Operations until December 31, 2013, subject to 
automatic one-year extensions unless either we or Ms. Forsa provided ninety days’ notice not to extend 
the term or until her employment is terminated by us or Ms. Forsa, which may be at any time, with or 
without cause, subject to the provisions of her employment agreement.  The agreement contained a 
covenant not to engage in any business that competes with us or to solicit employees or customers 
during the term of her employment and for a period of one year thereafter, as well as non-disparagement, 
confidentiality, and intellectual property provisions. 

During 2012, Ms. Forsa was entitled to receive an annual base salary of $400,000, and in accordance 
with the terms of her employment agreement, the Bonus Plan, and our benefit policies, was eligible for an 
annual target bonus of 100% of her base salary.  Ms. Forsa was entitled to four weeks of vacation per 
year. 

William Bayers 
Mr. Bayers’ employment agreement provides that Mr. Bayers will continue to serve as our Executive Vice 
President, General Counsel and Secretary until his employment is terminated by us or by Mr. Bayers, 
which may be at any time, with or without cause, subject to the provisions of his employment agreement.  
The employment agreement also contains confidentiality and intellectual property provisions. 

Mr. Bayers is entitled to receive an annual base salary of $400,000, and in accordance with the terms of 
his employment agreement, the Bonus Plan and our benefit policies, is eligible for an annual target bonus 
of 100% of his base salary. Mr. Bayers’ is entitled to four weeks of vacation per year.  He also is entitled 
to prior service credit for purposes of eligibility under the Company’s post-retirement medical plan.   

118 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End 2012 

Option Awards 

Number of Securities 
Underlying Unexercised 
Options 

Exercisable 
(#)(1) 

Unexercisable 
(#)(2) 

   460,526.25     1,381,578.75   

   Option 
Exercise 
Price ($)   
25.00

Option 
Expiration 
Date 
6/21/19   

Name 
Linda Zecher 

Eric Shuman 

—    

818,714   

25.00

6/21/19   

John Dragoon 

—    

614,035   

25.00

6/21/19   

Bethlam Forsa 

—    

491,228   

25.00

6/21/19   

William Bayers 

—    

327,485     25.00

6/21/19   

(1) 

(2) 

For Ms. Zecher, the options vested 25% on the date of grant and vest 25% on June 22, 2013, 
June 22, 2014 and June 22, 2015.  For all other executives, the options vest over four years with 
25% vesting on June 22, 2013, June 22, 2014, June 22, 2015 and June 22, 2016. 
Upon a change of control, all option awards will become immediately vested and exercisable.  

Potential Post-Employment Payments Upon Termination or Change in Control 

Change in Control Severance Plan 
We maintain the HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc. Change in Control Severance Plan to help retain key 
executives by reducing personal uncertainty that may arise from the possibility of a change in control, and 
to promote their objectivity and neutrality in evaluating transactions that may be in the best interest of the 
Company and our shareholders.  The plan establishes objective criteria to determine whether a change in 
control has occurred, and provides for severance payments and benefits only on a “double trigger” basis.  
The “double trigger” design is intended to further our goals to retain key executives upon a change in 
control. 

Each named executive officer participates in the Change in Control Severance Plan.  Under this plan, if 
the executive’s employment is terminated by us other than for “cause” (as defined in the MIP as 
described below under “Equity Award Provisions”), death or disability, or if the executive resigns for “good 
reason” within two years after a “change in control” or the period commencing on the date of entry into a 
definitive agreement or following a public announcement by the Company of a transaction or transactions 
that would result in a change in control (but not earlier than six months preceding the change in control), 
then HMH or its successor will be obligated to pay or provide the following benefits upon the employee’s 
execution of a release of claims: 

•  A lump sum payment equal to two times annual base salary; plus 

•  A lump sum payment equal to 200% (in the case of Ms. Zecher and Mr. Shuman) or 
100% (for other named executive officers) of the officer’s target annual bonus; plus 

•  A lump sum payment equal to a pro-rata portion of the target annual bonus. 

119 

 
 
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
  
    
     
  
  
  
    
    
    
     
  
  
  
    
    
    
     
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
The plan provides for a cutback of severance payments to the safe harbor amount if the payments would 
be subject to the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Code but only if such reduction would result 
in a greater net payment to the executive than he or she would have received without such reduction but 
after paying the excise tax.   

The term “good reason” generally means (a) material adverse change in duties or reporting relationship, 
(b) reduction in salary or annual bonus opportunity not in connection with an across-the-board reduction 
for other senior executives of the Company, or (c) forced relocation to a place of employment more than 
fifty miles from the employee’s place of employment immediately prior to the change in control; provided, 
however, that no termination of an employee’s employment will constitute a termination for good reason 
unless (i) the executive has first provided the Company with written notice specifically identifying the acts 
or omissions constituting the grounds for good reason within thirty days after the executive has or should 
reasonably be expected to have had knowledge of the occurrence thereof, (ii) the Company has not 
cured such acts or omissions within thirty days of its actual receipt of such notice, and (iii) the effective 
date of the employee’s termination for good reason occurs no later than ninety days after the initial 
existence of the facts or circumstances constituting good reason. 

The term “change in control” generally means, unless  otherwise  provided  in any employment  agreement 
between  the  Company  and  the applicable employee,  the occurrence  of any one of the following 
events:  

(i) 

any person (as such term is used in Section 13(d) of the Exchange Act) (other than a 

“permitted holder” (as defined in the Change in Control Severance Plan)), together with its affiliates (other 
than a permitted holder), is or becomes the beneficial owner, directly or indirectly, of more than 50% of 
the outstanding common stock or voting power of the Company by merger, consolidation, reorganization, 
or otherwise;  

(ii) 

the sale of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets, determined on a consolidated 

basis, to any person or group (as such term is used in Section 13(d) of the Exchange Act) of persons 
(other than any permitted holder or their affiliates); or  

(iii) 

the Company combines with another company if, immediately after such combination, the 

shareholders of the Company immediately prior to the combination hold, directly or indirectly, less than 
50% of the capital stock (of any class or classes) having general voting power under ordinary 
circumstances, in the absence of contingencies, to elect the directors of the Company of the combined 
entity; provided, however, that for purposes of this definition, no group will be deemed to have been 
formed solely by virtue of the execution and delivery of the Restructuring Support Agreement and the 
Investor Rights Agreement (each as defined in the Change in Control Severance Plan).  In addition, the 
Board of Directors may specifically provide that an event or transaction that would not otherwise qualify 
as a Change in Control be treated as a Change in Control for purposes of the Plan. 

Equity Award Provisions 
According to the terms of our MIP, if a named executive officer’s employment is terminated due to their 
death or disability or for any other reason except by us for “cause” (as defined below), the unvested 
portion of their equity awards will expire on the date they are terminated.  The vested portion of stock 
option awards will remain exercisable until the earlier of either the expiration of the option period or 12 
months after such termination in the case of termination due to death or disability, 30 days in the case of 
a voluntary resignation, or 90 days (180 days for Ms. Zecher) after any other termination other than 
termination by us for cause. 

If we terminate any named executive officer’s employment for cause, both the unvested equity awards 
and vested portions of the stock options will terminate on the same date their employment is terminated. 

Upon a change in control (as defined as in the Change in Control Severance Plan, except that the Board 
of Directors does not have an explicit right to provide that an event or transaction that would not otherwise 
qualify as a change in control be treated as a change in control for purposes of the MIP), and unless 
otherwise determined by the Compensation Committee and specified in the applicable award notice, all 

120 

 
 
 
 
 
 
stock options outstanding under the MIP will vest and become exercisable with respect to 100% of the 
shares of our common stock covered by such stock option.  

As a condition to the receipt of a stock option grant, the executive signs a restrictive covenant agreement, 
which restricts competition and solicitation during employment and for one year thereafter, as well as 
customary confidentiality and non-disparagement provisions. 

For purposes of the MIP, the term “cause” generally means, unless an award notice under the MIP states 
otherwise, (i) commission or guilty plea or plea of no contest to a felony (or its equivalent under applicable 
law) or any crime that involves moral turpitude, (ii) conduct that constitutes fraud or embezzlement or any 
acts of dishonesty in relation to his or her duties with the Company or our affiliates, (iii) engaging in gross 
negligence, bad faith, or intentional misconduct which causes either reputational or economic harm to the 
Company or our affiliates, (iv) continued refusal to substantially perform his or her essential duties with 
respect to the Company or our affiliates, which refusal is not remedied within ten days after written notice 
from the Board of Directors, or (v) breach of obligations under any service contract with the Company or 
our affiliates or any written Company employment policy, including any code of conduct, which is not 
cured, if curable, within ten days after Company notification of such breach. 

Employment Agreement for Linda Zecher 
If Ms. Zecher’s employment is terminated by us without “cause” (as defined above in the MIP) or by her 
for “good reason” (as defined below), subject to her execution of a release of claims, she will be entitled 
to (i) severance payment over twelve months equal to two times base salary; (ii) twelve months of 
COBRA payments; and (iii) a pro rata bonus for the year in which her employment terminates, based on 
the actual performance results for the year of termination and payable at such time as bonuses are 
generally paid. 

For purposes of Ms. Zecher’s employment agreement, “good reason” includes a resignation by her during 
the 30-day period commencing six months after either (i) a “change in control” (as defined in the MIP as 
described above), or (ii) the date that a majority (but not less than five) members of the Board of Directors 
is replaced during any twelve-month period by directors whose appointment or election is not endorsed 
by a majority of the members of the Board of Directors before the date of the appointment or election. 

As noted above, the provisions of Ms. Zecher’s employment agreement that relate to equity grants are no 
longer effective following our emergence from bankruptcy.  If Ms. Zecher becomes eligible for payments 
under both the Change in Control Severance Plan and her employment agreement, she would be entitled 
to the cash payments as dictated by the Severance Plan and any benefits continuation provided by her 
employment agreement. 

Employment Agreement for Eric Shuman 
If Mr. Shuman’s employment is terminated by us without cause prior to a change in control, we will 
provide him with severance consideration equal to continued salary for twelve months. 

Employment Agreement for John Dragoon 
If Mr. Dragoon’s employment is terminated by us without “cause” (as that term is commonly understood in 
connection with executive actions or inactions) prior to a change of control, he will be entitled to receive, 
subject to his execution of a release of claims in favor of the Company, (i) severance payments equal to 
one year’s base salary, (ii) six months of COBRA payments if he elects COBRA; and (iii) a pro rata bonus 
for the year in which his employment terminates, based on the actual performance results for the year of 
termination, payable at such time as executive bonuses are generally paid. 

Separation Agreement for Bethlam Forsa 
Ms. Forsa separated from the Company, effective January 3, 2013.  We entered into a separation 
agreement with her dated January 10, 2013, providing for severance in the amount of $400,000, monthly 
COBRA costs totaling $21,984.60, each payable over a twelve-month period, and her 2012 bonus equal 
to $400,000, paid on the first payroll date following her execution and non-revocation of the separation 

121 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
agreement.  As a condition to the receipt of any severance payments, Ms. Forsa executed a release of 
claims against the Company.  Additionally, she continues to be subject to the restrictive covenant 
agreement of her employment agreement and confidentiality and intellectual property agreement, which 
subjects her to a noncompete for one year following termination, as well as non-disparagement, 
confidentiality, and intellectual property provisions.   

Employment Agreement for William Bayers 
If Mr. Bayers’ employment is terminated by us for any reason other than for cause prior to a change in 
control, we will provide him with a severance payment equal to one year of continued base salary upon 
his execution of a separation and release agreement. 

Termination Payments 

The following table sets forth the payments each of our named executive officers would have received if 
their employment had been terminated by us without cause or by the executive for good reason on 
December 31, 2012 and there was no change of control.  

Death, 
Disability, 
Voluntary 
Resignation,  
Termination 
for Cause 
($) 
__ 

__ 

__ 

__ 

__ 

__ 

__ 

__ 

Name 
Linda Zecher (1)  Cash Severance 

Benefit 

 COBRA 
Payments 

Eric Shuman (2)  Cash Severance 

John Dragoon (3)  Cash Severance 

COBRA 
Payments 

Bethlam Forsa (4)  Cash Severance 

COBRA 
Payments 

William Bayers (5)  Cash Severance 

Amount Payable 

Termination By Us 
Without Cause  
($) 

Resignation for  
Good Reason  
($) 

2,400,000 

 17,433 

500,000

525,000

4,182

400,000

21,985 

400,000

__

__

__

__

__

400,000

21,985

__

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

(4) 

Upon a termination by us without cause or a resignation for good reason, Ms. Zecher would be 
entitled to two times base salary, a prorated bonus (which for this purpose is assumed to be the 
actual bonus payable for fiscal year 2012), and 12 months of COBRA payments. 
Upon a termination by us without cause, Mr. Shuman would be entitled to continued base salary 
for twelve months. 
Upon a termination by us without cause, Mr. Dragoon would be entitled to base salary, a prorated 
bonus (which for this purpose is assumed to be the actual bonus payable for fiscal year 2012), and 
six months of COBRA payments. 
Represent the amounts Ms. Forsa would have received under her employment agreement if her 
employment had been terminated on December 31, 2012 and does not reflect additional amounts 

122 

 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
provided by her separation agreement. 

(5) 

Upon a termination by us without cause, Mr. Bayers would be entitled to continued base salary for 
twelve months 

Change of Control Termination 
The following table sets forth the payments each of our named executive officers would have received if a 
change of control occurred, and, following a change of control, their employment had been terminated by 
us without cause or by the named executive officer for good reason, in each case on December 31, 2012.  
Although outstanding unvested stock options would become vested in connection with a change of 
control, the value of such acceleration is deemed to be $0 as of December 31, 2012 because as of such 
date the fair market value of the common stock did not exceed the exercise price of the stock options. 

Amounts Payable Upon a Change in Control 
($) 

Termination  
Without Cause  

Resignation for 
Good Reason 

Death, Disability, 
Termination for 
Cause 

Name 

Benefit 

Linda 
Zecher (1)   Cash Severance 

COBRA 
Payments 
Option 
Acceleration 
Value 

Eric 
Shuman (1) 

Cash Severance 
Option 
Acceleration 
Value 

John 
Dragoon (2) 

Bethlam 
Forsa (3) 

Cash Severance 
Option 
Acceleration 
Value 

Cash Severance 
Option 
Acceleration 
Value 

4,275,000

4,275,000

__

__

17,433

__

2,480,000

2,480,000

__

__

1,462,500

1,462,500

__

__

400,000

400,000

__

__

William 
Bayers (2)  Cash Severance 

1,600,000

1,600,000

Option 
Acceleration 
Value 

__

__

123 

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

__

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
(1)  Ms. Zecher’s and Mr. Shuman’s cash severance amounts upon a termination without cause or 

resignation for good reason consist of two times the sum of base salary and target bonus  plus a 
prorated bonus for the year of termination (which for this purpose is assumed to be the actual 
bonus payable for fiscal year 2012).  Under certain circumstances, if Ms. Zecher resigns for good 
reason, pursuant to her employment agreement, she would be entitled to benefits continuation. 

(2)  Mr. Dragoon’s and Mr. Bayers’ cash severance amounts upon a termination without cause or 
resignation for good reason consist of two times base salary plus target bonus and a prorated 
bonus for the year of termination (which for this purpose is assumed to be the actual bonus 
payable for fiscal year 2012). 

(3)  Represent the amounts Ms. Forsa would have received under her employment agreement if her 

employment had been terminated on December 31, 2012.  

Board Compensation 
The Nominating, Ethics and Governance committee of our Board of Directors is responsible for reviewing 
and recommending non-employee director compensation to the full board for its approval. We pay our 
non-employee directors a mix of cash and equity-based compensation.  We do not provide any 
perquisites or retirement benefits to our non-employee directors.  We do not provide any additional 
compensation to our employee directors. 

The cash compensation paid to our non-employee directors consists of an annual retainer for board and 
committee service, plus an annual retainer for service as chair of certain committees with respect to the 
full board.  Our non-employee directors (other than the Chairman of the Board) receive annual 
compensation of $165,000, of which $80,000 is payable in cash and $85,000 is payable in the form of 
restricted stock units (RSUs) described below.  Our Chairman receives annual compensation of 
$250,000, of which $120,000 is payable in cash and $130,000 is payable in RSUs.  The Company also 
reimburses all of its directors for expenses they incur in connection with attending Board meetings and 
committee meetings.   

In addition, each non-employee director will earn a fee for service on a committee and service as a 
committee chairperson, as applicable.  Each member of the Audit Committee (other than the 
Chairperson) receives an annual retainer of $10,000, and the Chairperson of the Audit Committee 
receives an annual retainer of $25,000.  Each member of the Compensation Committee (other than the 
Chairperson) receives an annual retainer of $10,000, and the Chairperson of the Compensation 
Committee receives an annual retainer of $25,000.  Each member of the Nominating, Ethics and 
Governance Committee (other than the Chairperson) receives an annual retainer of $5,000, and the 
Chairperson of the Nominating, Ethics and Governance Committee receives an annual retainer of 
$12,500.  Cash compensation is payable quarterly.  The schedule of retainers paid to our non-employee 
directors in effect as of December 31, 2012 is as follows:  

Position
Board of Directors
Audit Committee
Compensation Committee
Nominating, Ethics and Governance Committee

Annual Retainer
for Membership

$165,000
$10,000
$10,000
$5,000

Additional Retainer for
Chair role
$85,000
$15,000
$15,000
$7,500

The grants of RSUs in fiscal 2012 were valued based on the $25 per share value established in our Plan 
of Reorganization in connection with our emergence from bankruptcy.  All subsequent grants of restricted 
stock units will be granted at the fair market value of the common stock at the time of grant.  The RSUs 
generally vest on the first anniversary of the date of grant, subject to continued service as a member of 
the Board. 

124 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Prior to June 22, 2012, The cash compensation paid to our non-employee directors consisted of an 
annual retainer for board and committee service.  Our non-employee directors (other than the Chairman 
of the Board) receive annual cash compensation of $144,000.  Our Chairman received annual cash 
compensation of $216,000.  The Company also reimbursed all of its directors for expenses they incur in 
connection with attending Board meetings and committee meetings.   

Director Compensation Table – Fiscal 2012 

Name
Lawerence K. Fish
John F. Killian
Jill A. Greenthal
L. Gordan Crovitz
John R. McKernan, Jr.
E. Rogers Novak, Jr.
Sheru Chowdhry (4)
William Hagerty
Robert Schmitz
William Campbell
Todd Boehly (4)
Anthony Salcito (5)

Fees Earned or
Paid in Cash ($)(1)
188,000
139,500
53,228
33,750
103,630
9,130
-
79,500
72,000
72,000
-
-

Stock Awards ($) (2) Other ($) (3)

Total

130,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
-
-
-
-
-
-

78,170
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

396,170
224,500
138,228
118,750
188,630
94,130
-
79,500
72,000
72,000
-
-

(1)  Represents the aggregate cash retainers for board and committee service. 
(2)  Represents the aggregate grant date fair value of stock options granted during the year in 

accordance with the FASB ASC Topic 718 (disregarding any forfeiture assumptions. See Note 
12 to our consolidated financial statements for the assumptions made in determining these 
values.  These values do not correspond to the actual value that may be realized by our non-
employee directors for these awards.  As of December 31, 2012, each of Messrs. Killian, 
Greenthal, Crovitz, McKernan and Novak held 3,400 RSUs, and Mr. Fish held 5,200 RSUs.  No 
other non-employee directors held any stock awards.  

(3)  Represents portion of salary and benefits paid to Mr. Fish’s executive assistant not attributed to 

services rendered to the Company 

(4)  Mr. Chowdhry and Mr. Boehly are not considered independent directors and did not receive 

any director compensation. 

(5)  Mr. Salcito resigned from the Board of Directors on February 3, 2012 and did not receive any 

director compensation in 2012. 

Stock Plans 
The board of directors of HMH Holdings administers the HMH Management Incentive Plan (the “Plan”) 
pursuant to which the board, or a committee designated by the board may, from time to time, grant option 
and stock awards to employees and employees of our subsidiaries who, in the opinion of the board, are in 
a position to make a significant contribution to our success. The board of directors may grant options that 
vest over time or options that vest based on the attainment of performance goals specified by the board 
of directors. The stock related to award forfeitures remains outstanding and may be reallocated to new 
recipients.  

125 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                   
                 
               
                 
                   
                   
                        
                 
                     
                   
                        
                 
                     
                   
                        
                 
                   
                   
                        
                 
                       
                   
                        
                   
                           
                             
                        
                            
                     
                             
                        
                   
                     
                             
                        
                   
                     
                             
                        
                   
                               
                             
                        
                            
                               
                             
                        
                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owner’s and Management and Related 

Stockholders Matters 

As of February 28, 2013, common stock was the only class of HMH Holdings’ capital stock that was 
outstanding, and there were 69,958,989 shares of common stock outstanding as of that date.  The table 
below sets forth certain information regarding the beneficial ownership of the outstanding shares of 
common stock of HMH Holdings as of February 28, 2013 by: 

•  each person who is known to be the beneficial owner of more than 5% of HMH Holdings’ 

common stock; 

•  each member of HMH Holdings’ board of directors and each of our executive officers 

individually; and 

•  all members of HMH Holdings’ board of directors and executive officers as a group. 

Beneficial ownership has been determined under rules promulgated by the SEC. The information does 
not necessarily indicate beneficial ownership for any other purpose.  Shares of common stock subject to 
options currently exercisable and convertible securities currently convertible, or exercisable or convertible 
within 60 days after the dates of this report, are deemed outstanding for purposes of computing the 
percentage beneficially owned by the person or entity holding such securities but are not deemed 
outstanding for purposes of computing the percentage beneficially owned by any other person or entity. 

Each individual or entity shown on the table has furnished information with respect to beneficial 
ownership.  Except as otherwise indicated below, the address of each executive officer and director listed 
below is c/o HMH Holdings (Delaware), Inc., 222 Berkeley Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02116. 

Name of beneficial owner 

Percentage 

Shares of 
common stock 
beneficially 
owned 

Affiliates of Paulson & Co. Inc.(1) ......................................................  

18,183,856 

26.0% 

Affiliates of Anchorage Advisors L.L.C.(2) .......................................  

Affiliates of Blackrock Financial Management, Inc.(3) ....................  

Affiliates of Avenue Investments L.P.(4) ...........................................  

Affiliates of Q Investments L.P.(5) .....................................................  

Affiliates of Oak Hill Advisors L.P.(6) ................................................  

Lehman Commercial Paper Inc.(7) ....................................................  

Lawrence K. Fish ...............................................................................  

John R. McKernan, Jr. .......................................................................  

L. Gordon Crovitz...............................................................................  

Jill A. Greenthal ..................................................................................  

John F. Killian ....................................................................................  

Sheru Chowdry ..................................................................................  

E. Rogers Novak, Jr. ..........................................................................  

126 

6,833,320 

6,161,679 

6,053,596 

5,253,801 

4,304,296 

4,247,858 

-  

 -  

 -  

 -  

 -  

 -  

 -  

9.8% 

8.8% 

8.7% 

7.5% 

6.2% 

6.1% 

* 

*  

 *  

 *  

 *  

 * 

 * 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Linda K. Zecher(8) ...............................................................................  

460,526 

Eric L. Shuman ...................................................................................  

John K. Dragoon ................................................................................  

Bethlam Forsa ....................................................................................  

William F. Bayers ...............................................................................  

- 

- 

- 

-  

All Directors and Executive Officers as a group (16 persons)….. 

460,526 

*  

 * 

 *  

 *  

*  

* 

* 

Less than 1%.   

The information with respect to the affiliates of Paulson & Co. Inc. includes the shares of common 
stock held by funds affiliated with Paulson & Co., Inc. including Paulson Advantage Master LTD 
which owns 5.6%, Paulson Advantage Plus Master LTD which owns 12.5%, and Paulson Credit 
Opportunities Master LTD which owns 7.7%.  Address is 1251 Avenue of the Americas, New York, 
New York 10020. 

The information with respect to the affiliates of Anchorage Advisors L.L.C. includes the shares of 
common stock held by funds affiliated with Anchorage Advisors L.L.C. including Anchorage Capital 
Master Offshore LTD which owns 6.4%.  Address is 610 Broadway, New York, New York 10012. 

The information with respect to the affiliates of Blackrock Financial Management, Inc. includes the 
shares of common stock held by funds affiliated with Blackrock Financial Management, Inc. 
including Blackrock Credit Investors Master Fund LP which owns 5.2%.  Address is c/o Blackrock, 
Inc., 55 East 52nd St., New York, New York 10055. 

The information with respect to the affiliates of Avenue Investments L.P. includes the shares of 
common stock held by funds affiliated with Avenue Investments L.P. including Avenue Investments 
L.P. which owns 6.7%.  Address is 399 Park Avenue, New York, New York 10022. 

The information with respect to the affiliates of Q Investments, L.P. includes the shares of common 
stock held by funds affiliated with Q Investments L.P. including R2 Top Hat LTD which owns 5.9%.  
Address is 301 Commerce Street, Fort Worth, Texas 76102. 

The information with respect to the affiliates of Oak Hill Advisors, L.P. includes the shares of 
common stock held by funds affiliated with Oak Hill Advisors L.P.  Address is 1114 Avenue of the 
Americas, New York, New York 10036. 

The information with respect to Lehman Commercial Paper Inc. includes the shares of common 
stock held by Lehman Commercial Paper Inc. which owns 6.1%.  Address is 1271 Avenue of the 
Americas, New York, New York 10020. 

Includes 460,526 shares issuable with respect to options exercisable within 60 days of February 
28, 2013. 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

(4) 

(5) 

(6) 

(7) 

(8) 

.   

127 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The following table provides information with respect to our equity compensation plans under which our 
equity securities were authorized for issuance as of December 31, 2012. 

Equity Compensation Plan Information 

Number of securities to 
be issued upon 
exercise of outstanding 
options, warrants and 
restricted stock units 

Weighted-average 
exercise price of 
outstanding options, 
warrants and restricted 
stock units 

Number of securities 
remaining available for 
future issuance under 
equity compensation plans 
(excluding securities 
reflected in column (a)) 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

            8,618,692 

             $25.00 

                   3,252,654 

                      - 

                  - 

                               - 

Plan Category 

Equity 
compensation 
plans approved 
by security 
holders 
Equity 
compensation 
plans not 
approved by 
security holders 
Total 

128 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Item 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions 

Investor Rights Agreement 

In connection with our restructuring, on June 22, 2012, we entered into an Investor Rights Agreement (the 
“Investor Rights Agreement”) with our new shareholders.   The Investor Rights Agreements contains, 
among others, provisions granting our shareholders party thereto from time to time certain registration 
rights as described in further detail below and provisions related to confidentiality, holdback agreements, 
our public reporting obligations and our obligation to register our common stock under the Exchange Act 
after October 1, 2013 in certain circumstances.  

Registration Rights 

The Investor Rights Agreement provides our shareholders party thereto from time to time with certain 
registration rights. 

Any holder or holders who own at least 25% of our outstanding common stock may require us to 
consummate an underwritten initial public offering after April 1, 2013 pursuant to the exercise of demand 
registration rights on a secondary basis so long as the total proposed offering size is at least $150 million 
(an “IPO Demand Right”).  If an IPO Demand Right is exercised and the initial public offering price 
equates to a total equity value of our Company of not less than $1.5 billion, the holders exercising the IPO 
Demand Right may also, at their option, require all other stockholders to sell in such initial public offering 
their pro rata share of the common stock being sold, not to exceed 15% of the shares held by such holder 
(an “IPO Drag Right”). 

Any time after we become an Exchange Act public reporting company, we are required to use 
commercially reasonable efforts to file and cause to become effective a shelf registration statement (on 
Form S-3 if permitted) for the benefit of all holders party to the Investor Rights Agreement, and any 
individual holder of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock can demand an unlimited number of 
“shelf takedowns” so long as the total offering size exceeds $100 million. 

Each holder or holders who own at least 15% of our outstanding common stock will have, after our initial 
public offering (i) one Form S-1 demand registration right per annum, which may be conducted in an 
underwritten offering as long as the total offering price is at least $100 million; and (ii) unlimited Form S-3 
registration rights, which may be conducted in underwritten offerings as long as the total offering price is 
at least $100 million, each subject to customary cutback provisions. 

Each holder party to the Investor Rights Agreement has unlimited piggyback registration rights with 
respect to underwritten offerings, subject to certain exceptions and limitations. 

The foregoing registration rights are subject to certain cutback provisions and customary 
suspension/blackout provisions. We have agreed to pay all registration expenses under the Investor 
Rights Agreement, and, in limited circumstances, the underwriting fees and commissions for certain 
holders.   

Indebtedness 
Affiliates of certain of our stockholders, including the stockholders holding 5% or more of HMH Holdings’ 
common stock listed in “Security ownership of certain beneficial owners and management,” also currently 
own a portion of our indebtedness, including indebtedness outstanding under our Term Loan. 

Debt-for-Equity Exchange 
Upon the Company’s emergence from Chapter 11 bankruptcy proceedings, holders of the Term Loan, 
Revolving Loan, and 10.5% Senior Notes were issued post-emergence shares of new common stock 
pursuant to the final Plan on a pro rata basis.  Certain of these holders of the Term Loan, Revolving Loan, 
and 10.5% Senior Notes were also equity holders prior to the consummation of the Plan.  The amount of 

129 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
the gain attributable to the debt to equity conversion, net of elimination of fees and other charges, of 
$1,010.3 million, which is associated to the holders of the Term Loan, Revolving Loan, and 10.5% Senior 
Notes that were also equity holders prior to the consummation of the Plan, was charged to capital in 
excess of par value. 

Item 14. Principal Accountant’s Fees and Services 

The table below provides a summary of the fees paid by us to our auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers 
LLP, for the following periods: 

Audit fees

Audit-related fees

Tax fees

All other fees

Total

Years Ended December 31,

2012

2011

$     

1,857,139

$     

2,034,749

6,592

27,867

1,800

214,000

94,663

-

$     

1,893,398

$     

2,343,412

Audit fees consist of fees for professional services necessary to perform an audit of the financial 
statements, review of the quarterly and annual reports and statutory audits and other services required to 
be performed by our independent auditors. 

Audit-related fees consist of fees for services that are reasonably related to the performance of the audit 
or review of our financial statements including the support of business acquisition and divestiture 
activities. 

Tax fees consist of fees for professional services rendered for assistance with federal, state, local and 
international tax compliance, tax planning, and tax advice. 

All other fees include licenses to technical accounting research software. 

The Audit Committee approves in advance all audit and non-audit services to be provided by the 
independent auditors.  Under the Audit Committee’s pre-approval policy for 2012, the Chairman of the 
Audit Committee has the delegated authority from the Committee to pre-approve services with fees up to 
$200,000.  Any such pre-approvals are to be reviewed and ratified by the Audit Committee at its next 
meeting.  The Audit Committee requires the independent auditors and management to report on actual 
fees charged for each category of service periodically throughout the year.  

Item 15. Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules 

Financial Statements – the response to this portion is set forth in Financial Statements and 
Supplementary Data. 

Financial Statement Schedules – the response to this portion is set forth in Financial Statements and 
Supplementary Data.  All other financial statement schedules are not required under the related 
instructions or are inapplicable and therefore have been omitted. 

Exhibits – see below. 

130 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Exhibit No.  Title 

2.1 

3.1 

3.2 

4.1 

4.2 

4.3 

4.4 

4.5 

4.6 

4.7 

4.8 

4.9 

4.10 

4.11 

10.1 

10.2 

10.3 

10.4 

14.1 

21.1 

Prepackaged Joint Plan of Reorganization of the Debtors Under Chapter 11 of the 
Bankruptcy Code 5.11.2012 

Restated Certificate of Incorporation 6.21.2012 

Amended and Restated By-laws 6.22.2012 

Superpriority Senior Secured Debtor-in-Possession and Exit Term Loan Credit Agreement 
5.22.2012 

First Amendment to DIP/Exit Term Loan Credit Agreement 6.11.2012 

Letter Waiver and Amendment No. 2 to Credit Agreement 6.20.2012 

Term Facility Guarantee and Collateral Agreement 5.22.2012 

Superpriority Senior Secured Debtor-in-Possession and Exit Revolving Loan Credit 
Agreement 5.22.2012 

First Amendment to DIP/Exit Revolving Loan Credit Agreement 6.20.2012 

Second Amendment to DIP/Exit Revolving Loan Credit Agreement 6.20.2012 

Revolving Facility Guarantee and Collateral Agreement 5.22.2012 

Term Loan/Revolving Facility Lien Subordination and Intercreditor Agreement 5.22.2012 

Investor Rights Agreement 6.22.2012 

Director Nomination Agreement 6.22.2012 

2012 Management Incentive Plan 

2012 Management Incentive Plan Form of Award Notice 

2012 Change in Control Severance Plan 

2012 Management Incentive Plan Restricted Stock Unit Award Notice 

Code of Conduct 

List of Subsidiaries 

131 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Schedule II 
Valuation and Qualifying Accounts 

Balance at Beginning
of Year

$                          

$                          

2012
Allowance for doubtful accounts
Reserve for returns
Reserve for royalty advances
Deferred tax valuation allowance
2011
Allowance for doubtful accounts
Reserve for returns
Reserve for royalty advances
Deferred tax valuation allowance
For the period March 10, 2010 to December 31, 2010
Allowance for doubtful accounts
Reserve for returns
Reserve for royalty advances
Deferred tax valuation allowance
For the period January 1, 2010 to March 9, 2010
Allowance for doubtful accounts
Reserve for returns
Reserve for royalty advances
Deferred tax valuation allowance

18,229
25,614
12,262
822,485

10,249
20,130
3,700
434,471

5,527
21,395
-

246,134

7,834
27,856
109,541
910,096

$                             

$                             

Net Charges
to Expenses
2,113
$           
44,213
8,770
-

Utilization of
Allowances

Balance at End
of Year

$              

(9,799)
(44,043)
(594)
(310,251)

$                  

10,543
25,784
20,438
512,234

$           

8,910
49,388
8,802
388,014

$                 

(930)
(43,904)
(240)

-

$                  

18,229
25,614
12,262
822,485

$           

5,238
38,751
6,240
188,337

$               

437
1,954
740
129,687

$                 

(516)
(40,016)
(2,540)
-

$                  

10,249
20,130
3,700
434,471

$              

(2,744)
(8,415)
(37)
-

$                    

5,527
21,395
110,244
1,039,783

132 

 
 
 
 
                             
           
              
                    
                             
              
                    
                    
                          
                  
            
                  
                             
           
              
                    
                               
              
                    
                    
                          
         
                      
                  
                             
           
              
                    
                                   
              
                
                       
                          
         
                      
                  
                             
              
                
                    
                          
                 
                      
                  
                          
         
                      
               
 
2 0 1 2

© Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Publishing Company. All rights reserved. 03/13 MS70422

hmhco.com